Mark

Mark front

Introduction to the Gospel of Mark

Part 1: General Introduction

Outline of the Book of Mark

1. Introduction (1:1-13)
2. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee
   • Early ministry (1:14-3:6)
   • Jesus becomes more popular among the people (3:7-5:43)
   • Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26)
3. Progress toward Jerusalem, repeated times when Jesus predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52)
4. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37)
5. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8)

What is the Book of Mark about?

The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about who Jesus was and what he did during his life. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.

How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel according to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark wrote.” (See: How to Translate Names)

Who wrote the Book of Mark?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. Many experts think that Peter the Apostle was the source of what Mark wrote about Jesus.

Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God and disciple and parable)

Part 3: Important Translation Issues

What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three of the gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This phrase could mean a few things:

*The phrase son of man can simply be describing that someone’s father is also a human being. Therefore, the person being described is literally a son of a man, or a human being.

*The phrase sometimes is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” This description tells us that the person ascending to the throne of God looked like a human being. This description is than the first different because God gives this son of man authority forever. Therefore, the title son of man became a title for the Messiah.

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?

The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” forty-two times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.

Sabbath/Sabbaths

Oftentimes in the culture of the Bible, religious festivals would be written in the plural form of the word instead of a singular form. This occurs in Mark as well. In the ULT, the word should be kept plural, “sabbaths”. This is simply for the sake of being as close to the original text as possible. In the UST it is changed to singular to make more sense of the use of the word in its context, “sabbath”.

What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Mark?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel. * “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16) * “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44) * “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46) * “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)

The following passage in not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar as the modern versions of the Bible. * “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Go into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. He who believes and is baptized will be saved, and he who does not believe will be condemned. These signs will go with those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20)

(See: Textual Variants)

Mark 1

Mark 1 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

“You can make me clean”

Leprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: clean, wash)

“The kingdom of God is near”

Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.”

Mark 1:1

ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ

This verse introduces the reader to the story of Jesus the Messiah as told by Mark. This functions as an introduction to the entire book of Mark. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ

Son of God is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. If this would be misunderstood, you could use the alternate translation: “who is God’s Son” (See: Translating Son and Father)

Mark 1:2

καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ

If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an active form. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah the prophet wrote” (See: Active or Passive)

Ἠσαΐᾳ

Isaiah is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

πρὸ προσώπου σου

before your face is an idiom which means that “the messenger” was sent first, and then the second person came after them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify. Alternate Translation: “first” or “before you”. (See: Idiom)

προσώπου σου…τὴν ὁδόν σου

Here, both of the words your refer to Jesus and are singular. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου

That the messenger will prepare your way represents preparing the people for the Lord’s arrival. If this would be misunderstood your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will prepare the people for your arrival” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 1:3

φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ,

Alternate translation: “The voice of someone crying out in the wilderness is heard, saying:” or “They hear the sound of someone calling out in the wilderness, saying:”

φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ

a voice here is used to depict the person of the “messenger” from the previous verse. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it “The voice of the messenger is crying out in the wilderness” (See: Synecdoche)

ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ

Make ready the way of the Lord and make his paths straight mean the same thing. If this would be confusing in your language, you could combine the two. See the next note for alternate translations. (See: Parallelism)

ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου

Make ready the way of the Lord represents being prepared to hear the Lord’s message when he comes. Alternate translation: “Prepare to hear the Lord’s message when he comes” (See: Metaphor)

ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου

People prepare for the coming of Lord by repenting of their sins. Alternate translation: “Repent and be ready for the Lord to come” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Κυρίου

the Lord in this verse refers to Jesus the Messiah. Do not translate this as Jesus, as this would not reflect the quote well. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν

The imagery of paths or the way is figuratively used here to indicate that John will prepare the people to listen to the Lord’s message. If someone prepares a path for another, they make the path walkable. If someone in high authority was coming, they would make sure the roads were clear from any hazards. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can use an alternate translation: “Prepare the people for the arrival of the Lord ” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-idiom/01.md)

Mark 1:4

Ἰωάννης

John is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

καὶ κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν

The baptism of repentance proclaimed by John likely has its origin in baptisms which were done to gentiles who were converting to Judaism. This baptism was done one time, and showed that the person was converting from their former way of life to the new way of life. If this would be misunderstood, you can state it explicitly. Alternate Translation: “and preaching that he must baptize them so that they might follow God and turn from their former evil ways”

Mark 1:5

ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα

The word region is used here to refer to the people living within Judea. Alternate translation: “the people from Judea and Jerusalem” (See: Synecdoche)

πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμεῖται πάντες

Here, the whole region and all the people are generalizations that refers to a great number of people, not to every single person. Alternate translation: “many people from Judea and Jerusalem” (See: Hyperbole)

καὶ ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “And John was baptizing them in the Jordan River as there were confessing their sins” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 1:6

καὶ ἦν ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου, καὶ ζώνην δερματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔσθων ἀκρίδας καὶ μέλι ἄγριον.

This verse helps provide background to John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

καὶ ἦν ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου, καὶ ζώνην δερματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔσθων ἀκρίδας καὶ μέλι ἄγριον.

This description of John the Baptist would have reminded the readers of Elijah, who was a prophet in the Old Testament. John the Baptist is commonly associated with Elijah in the New Testament by Jesus (See John 1:21). You do not need to clarify this in your translation. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

Mark 1:7

ἐκήρυσσεν

The pronoun He is referring to John. Alternate translation: “John was proclaiming” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

κύψας λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ

To stoop down to untie someone’s sandal was the job of a servant. John is comparing himself to a servant, which is commonly look at as dirty and only for the lowest class. He did this to show how great Jesus is. His audience would have understood this at the time. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a similar task which would be reserved for people of a lower class. Alternate translation: “and I am not even worthy to do the lowly task of removing his shoes” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 1:8

αὐτὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ

This metaphor compares John’s baptism with water to the future baptism with the Holy Spirit. In the same way that the people were cleansed by John’s baptism, they will be fully cleansed by the Holy Spirit when Jesus comes. If possible, use the same word for baptize here as you used for John’s baptism to keep the comparison between the two. (See: Metaphor)

δὲ

Here, baptism by water and baptism by the Holy Spirit are being contrasted. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

Mark 1:9

καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις

And it happened that in those days marks the beginning of a new event in the story line. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event(See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἐβαπτίσθη…ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου

If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate he was baptized by John with an active form. Alternate translation: “John baptized him” (See: Active or Passive)

ἦλθεν Ἰησοῦς ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲτ τῆς Γαλιλαίας

Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Jesus went from Nazareth in Galilee” or “Jesus went out from Nazareth in Galilee” (See: Go and Come)

Mark 1:10

καὶ εὐθὺς ἀναβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος

It is important to note that Jesus saw the heavens opening up at the same time as he was coming up out of the water. To make this more clear in your language you can state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “At the time that Jesus was coming up out of the water” (See: Connect — Simultaneous Time Relationship)

τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν

Spirit coming down on him like a dove could mean: (1) the Spirit descended upon Jesus as a bird descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “The Spirit of God came down from heaven as a bird does” (2) the Spirit literally looked like a dove as he descended upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “The Spirit came down from heaven, looking like a dove” (See: Simile)

εὐθὺς

The word immediately occurs 41 more times throughout the book of Mark. You should try to translate it with the same word or phrase each time it occurs unless for some reason it would be unnatural in your language in certain contexts.(See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

εἶδεν σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς

If it would be more natural in your language, you could say he saw the heavens being split open with an active form. Alternate translation: “he saw God open the heavens” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 1:11

καὶ φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν

Luke speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-personification/01.md)

ὁ Υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός

Son is an important title for Jesus. The title Son describes Jesus’ relationship with God the Father. (See: Translating Son and Father)

Mark 1:12

εὐθὺς

See how you translated the word immediately in Mark 1:10

τὸ Πνεῦμα αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει εἰς τὴν ἔρημον

Alternate translation: “The Spirit led Jesus into the wilderness”

Mark 1:13

πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ

If it would be clearer in your language, you could say being tempted by Satan with an active form. Alternate translation: “For 40 days Satan continued tempting him” or “For 40 days the devil kept trying to persuade him disobey God”

ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων

Alternate Translation: “Jesus was living among the wild animals”

οἱ ἄγγελοι διηκόνουν αὐτῷ.

The angels were likely providing Jesus with his daily needs, such as food and water. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 1:14

μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην

If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after the governor Herod arrested John” (See: Active or Passive)

μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην

The original readers of Mark would have known that John was arrested because he rebuked Herod Antipas because of Herod’s sins. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην

Mark is using this phrase as background information to set the scene for Jesus’ ministry. Jesus did not begin his ministry until John had been arrested. (See: Connect — Background Information)

ἦλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν

It might be helpful for your readers to clarify that Jesus was returning to Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus returned to the Galilee district” or “Jesus went back to the district of Galilee”

κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον

Alternate Translation: “telling the people there about the good news”

Mark 1:15

πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς καὶ ἤγγικεν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ

the time was been fulfilled means that something which God said would happen has finally happened. Oftentimes, this refers to prophecy of the Old Testament being fulfilled in the New Testament. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said that his rule would come near, and now it has” (See: Idiom)

ἤγγικεν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ

the kingdom of God is a phrase that includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God. It also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun kingdom with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “God is going to rule” or “God is about to begin His rule” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-abstractnouns/01.md)

Mark 1:16

Σίμωνα καὶ Ἀνδρέαν

Simon and Andrew are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “throwing a net into the water to catch fish” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἦσαν γὰρ ἁλιεῖς

The phrase for they were fishermen explains the reason why they were casting their nets. They were casting their nets because that was their job. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information.Alternate translation: “They were casting their nets because this was their job” (See: Connect — Background Information)

Mark 1:17

δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου

Come after me is an idiom which means to follow someone. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Follow me” (See: Idiom)

ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων

fishers of men means Simon and Andrew will teach people God’s message, so others will also follow Jesus. If your readers would not understand, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “I will teach you to gather men to me like you gather fish” (See: Metaphor)

ἀνθρώπων

men here refers not just to men, but to people in general. Alternate Translation: “of people” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Mark 1:18

καὶ εὐθέως

See note on 1:10. (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

Mark 1:19

καὶ αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίκτυα

Assumed in this passage is that James and John’s net was torn from fishing. Oftentimes, nets get torn by rocks and sticks which are in the water. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate Translation: “They were in the boat fixing their nets, for they had ripped” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 1:20

ἐκάλεσεν αὐτούς

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly that Jesus called to James and John. Alternate translation: “having called them to come with him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ

Alternate translation: “James and John followed Jesus”

Mark 1:22

ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς

The author intentionally leaves out the repeated information in this sentence. If this would be misunderstood in you in you language, you can clarify. Alternate translation: “for he was teaching them as someone who has authority teaches and not as the scribes teach” (See: Ellipsis)

ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς.

Here, Jesus’ teaching is being contrasted with the way that the Jewish teachers taught. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: Connect — Contrast Relationship)

ἐξεπλήσσοντο

Alternate translation: “The people in the synagogue were amazed”

Mark 1:23

καὶ εὐθὺς ἦν ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ

The person with the unclean spirit enters the synagogue while Jesus is preaching. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “While Jesus was teaching, a man who was controlled by an evil spirit entered the synagogue.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 1:24

τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ?

The demons ask this rhetorical question meaning there is no reason for Jesus to interfere with them and that they desire him to leave them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth, leave us alone! There is no reason for you to interfere with us.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς

us here refers to many spirits. Often times in the biblical passages about evil spirits, there are multiple spirits controlling one person (Mark 5:1-20). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you come to destroy all of us evil spirits” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς

The demons ask this rhetorical question to urge Jesus not to harm them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not destroy us!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 1:28

καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς, πανταχοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας

This is is a metaphor which means that the story of what just happened in the synagogue spread from person to person until many heard about it in the region of Galilee. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “The story about Jesus quickly spread from person to person throughout the entire region of Galilee” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 1:29

ἦλθον

Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “They went to the house of Simon and Andrew” (See: Go and Come)

Mark 1:30

ἡ…πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα

This phrase gives background information about Peter’s mother-in-law. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

πυρέσσουσα

A fever is an illness which causes the temperature of the body to increase. This results in the need to lie down in bed and rest as Peter’s mother-in-law was doing. If your reader would not be familiar with this, you could use a general expression. Alternate Translation: “being sick” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Mark 1:31

ἤγειρεν αὐτὴν, κρατήσας τῆς χειρός

Here, the author mentions Jesus helping her up before mentioning that Jesus took her by the hand, even though it happened in the opposite order. If this is confusing in your language, you could make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “Jesus took her hand and helped her up out of bed” (See: Order of Events)

ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετός

This is a metaphor meaning that Jesus healed her of the fever. If your readers would not understand, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed her of the fever” (See: Metaphor)

διηκόνει αὐτοῖς

If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly that she likely served them food. Alternate translation: “she provided them with food and drinks” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 1:32

ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης, ὅτε ἔδυ ὁ ἥλιος

*Now when it became evening, after the sun had set gives background information which helps the reader know when in the day this was occurring. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας καὶ τοὺς δαιμονιζομένους

The word all is an exaggeration to emphasize the great number of people who came. It is not likely that every single sick person was brought to Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “A great number who were sick or possessed by demons” (See: Hyperbole)

Mark 1:33

ἦν ὅλη ἡ πόλις ἐπισυνηγμένη πρὸς τὴν θύραν

The word city is a metonym for the people who lived in the city. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Many people from that city gathered outside of Simon’s house” (See: Metonymy)

καὶ ἦν ὅλη ἡ πόλις ἐπισυνηγμένη πρὸς τὴν θύραν

The entire city did not gather at his door. This expression is used to express that a large number of people came to him. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Many people from the city gathered at Jesus’ door” (See: Hyperbole)

Mark 1:37

πάντες ζητοῦσίν σε

The word Everyone is an exaggeration to emphasize that many people were looking for Jesus. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Many people are looking for you” (See: Hyperbole)

Mark 1:38

ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ

Here, Jesus uses the word us to refer to himself, along with Simon, Andrew, James, and John. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

εἰς τὰς ἐχομένας κωμοπόλεις

Which towns the surrounding towns are is clarifed in the following passages. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

Mark 1:39

κηρύσσων, εἰς τὰς συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια ἐκβάλλων

Jesus’ was both preaching and casting out demons. Jesus was not necessarily doing these in any order. Use the appropriate connecting word or phrase to show that Jesus was doing both of these things together. (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous/01.md)

ἦλθεν…εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν

The words in all are an exaggeration used to emphasize that Jesus went to many locations during his ministry. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys this idea. Alternate translation: “He went to many places in Galilee” (See: Hyperbole)

Mark 1:41

σπλαγχνισθεὶς

Here, the word moved is an idiom meaning to feel emotion about another person’s need. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having felt compassion for him” (See: Idiom)

σπλαγχνισθεὶς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun compassion in another way. Alternate translation: “Jesus felt compassionate” (See: Abstract Nouns)

θέλω

If I am willing would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply what Jesus is willing to do from the context. Alternate translation: “I am willing to make you clean” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 1:43

The word him used here refers to the leper whom Jesus healed.

Mark 1:44

σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ

Jesus told the man to show himself to the priest so that the priest could look at his skin to see if his leprosy was really gone. The law of Moses required people to present themselves to the priest if they had been unclean but were now clean. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

σεαυτὸν δεῖξον

Here, the word yourself represents the skin of the leper. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “show your skin” (See: Synecdoche)

Mark 1:45

ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον

Here, spread the word widely is a metaphor for telling people in many places about what had happened. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “began to tell people in many places about what Jesus had done” (See: and Metaphor)

πάντοθεν

The word all sides is a hyperbole used to emphasize how very many places the people came from. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” (See: Hyperbole)

Mark 2

Mark 2 General Notes

Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus heals the paralytic (2:1-12)
2. Jesus tells Levi to follow him (2:13,14)
3. The feast at Levi’s house (2:15-17)
4. Questions about fasting (2:18-22)
5. Picking grain on the Sabbath (2:22-28)

Special concepts in this chapter

“Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: sin, sinful, sinner, sinning)

Fasting and Feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: fast, fasting)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical Questions

The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son (Mark 2:7). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant (Mark 2:25-26). (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 2:1

ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The people there heard that he was staying at his home” (See: Active or Passive)

καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ

The author tells us that Jesus entered again to remind us that he has already been in Capernaum in 1:21. You could make this more explicit in your language. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus came a second time to the town called Capernaum” (See: Connect — Background Information)

ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν

There is some debate over whose house this is. It could possibly be (1) Peter’s house. Peter’s house functioned as the place where Jesus always returned to when we was in the town of Capernaum. Alternate translation: “He was in Peter’s house” or (2) you could leave it generic, and not specify whose house it was. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 2:3

παραλυτικὸν

A paralytic is someone who is not able to completely use their body. Sometimes they just can’t use their legs, but sometimes they can’t use anything. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Mark 2:4

ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι

Houses where Jesus lived had flat roofs made of clay and covered with tiles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they removed the tiles from the part of the roof above where Jesus was. And when they had dug through the clay roof, they lowered” or “they made a hole in the roof above where Jesus was, and then they lowered” (See: Translate Unknowns)

κράβαττον

A mat was a portable bed that could also be used to transport a person. Think of something in your culture that you might carry an injured person on to get them medical attention. Alternate translation: “a stretcher” or “a cot” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/translate-unknown/01.md)

Mark 2:5

ἰδὼν…τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν

having seen the men’s faith could mean: (1) only the men who carried the paralyzed man had faith. (2) the paralyzed man and the men who brought him to Jesus all had faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τέκνον

The word Child here shows Jesus cared for the man as a father cares for a son. This man was not actually Jesus’ son. If your language has a term like this, you can clarify. Alternate translation: “Beloved” (See: Kinship)

Mark 2:6

διαλογιζόμενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν

Here, hearts is a metonym for the people’s thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “were thinking to themselves” (See: Metonymy)

Mark 2:7

τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ?

The scribes used this question to show their anger that Jesus said “Your sins are forgiven.” If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This man should not speak this way!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός?

The scribes used this question to say that since only God is able to forgive sins, then Jesus should not say “Your sins are forgiven.” If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Only God can forgive sins, not a man!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 2:8

τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ

The word spirit is a metonym for his inner thoughts and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his inner being” or “within himself” (See: Metonymy)

ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ

This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he knew” or “Even though Jesus had not heard them, he was fully aware”(See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν?

Jesus uses this question to tell the scribes that what they are thinking is wrong. It also shows that He knows what they are thinking without them saying it out loud. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “What you are thinking is wrong.” or “Do not think that I am blaspheming.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ταῦτα…ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν

The word hearts is a metonym for their inner thoughts and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this inside yourselves” or “these things” (See: Metonymy)

Mark 2:9

τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει?

Jesus uses this question to make the scribes think about what might prove whether or not he could really forgive sins. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I just said to the paralyzed man, ‘Your sins are forgiven.’ You may think that it is harder to say ‘Get up, take up your bed, and walk,’ because the proof of whether or not I can heal him will be shown by whether or not he gets up and walks.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 2:10

εἰδῆτε

The word you refers to the scribes and the crowd. If this would be misunderstood, you can state this explicitly.

ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man.” If this is confusing in your language, you can use the second person and convey the respect in another way. Alternate translation: “that I am the Son of Man and I have authority” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Mark 2:12

ἔμπροσθεν πάντων

Alternate translation: “in the presence of everyone in the house”

Mark 2:13

καὶ ἐξῆλθεν πάλιν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτόν, καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτούς

This phrase acts as background information to tell the reader where the next event is taking place. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: Connect — Background Information)

πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐτόν

Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “A large crowd went to him” (See: Go and Come)

Mark 2:14

Λευεὶν τὸν τοῦ Ἁλφαίου

Alphaeus was the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 2:15

ἦσαν γὰρ πολλοὶ, καὶ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ

Alternate translation: “There were many tax collectors and sinful people who followed Jesus”

καὶ πολλοὶ τελῶναι καὶ ἁμαρτωλοὶ συνανέκειντο τῷ Ἰησοῦ

These two groups are used to express that Jesus and his students were eating with many people who the religious leaders looked down upon. (See: Hendiadys)

Mark 2:16

οἱ γραμματεῖς τῶν Φαρισαίων

This phrase tells the reader that these scribes were members of the group known as the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “The scribes, who were members of the Pharisees” (See: Possession)

ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει?

The scribes and Pharisees asked this question to show they disapproved of Jesus’ hospitality to tax collectors and sinners. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He should not eat with sinners and tax collectors!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 2:17

οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες

Jesus used this proverb about sick people and doctors to teach them that only people who know that they are sinful realize that they need Jesus. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture.(See: Proverbs)

οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες. οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς

Those who are sick are equated with those who are wanting to be saved by Jesus. The healthy are equated with those who do not think they need Jesus. Jesus does not actually think those who do not want him are healthy, but the opposite. He says this because those people think they are healthy in their own eyes and do not need Jesus. If this would be confusing in your language, you be more explicit. Alternate translation: “Those who suppose themselves to be healthy do not need a doctor. It is those who know that they are sick who need a doctor”. (See: Irony)

οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες

The words have a need of a physician are assumed in the second phrase. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: Those who are healthy do not need a doctor, but those whoa re sick need a doctor” (See: Ellipsis)

οὐκ ἦλθον καλέσαι…ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς

The words I came...to call are understood from the phrase before this. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I came to call sinners” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 2:18

ἔρχονται

They came refers to an unknown group of people. It is best to leave this unknown, as it is not clear who is being talked about here. Alternate translation: “A group of unknown men came” (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες

This fast is likely referring to the fast which the religious leaders performed twice per week. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now, the students of John and the Pharisees were performing their bi-weekly fast” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες.

This phrase provides background information. The author is telling us this to help us to understand why Jesus was being asked this question. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now, it happened at the time when the students of John the Baptizer and the Pharisees were fasting.” (See: Background Information)

Mark 2:19

μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν?

Jesus uses this question to remind the people of something they already know and to encourage them to apply it to him and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Wedding attendants do not fast while the bridegroom is with them. Rather they celebrate and feast.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν?

It is best to keep this verse the way it is. Do not clarify that it is about Jesus. (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

Mark 2:20

ἀπαρθῇ…ὁ νυμφίος

If it would be more natural in your language, you could say the bridegroom may be taken away with an active form. Alternate translation: “the bridegroom will leave his friends” (See: Active or Passive)

τότε

then here shows the reader that the bridegroom must first leave, and then the friends will begin fasting. Make sure this is clear in your language. (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

Mark 2:21

οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν

When a piece of clothing gets a hole in it, another piece of cloth, a patch, is sewn onto the clothing to cover the hole. If this patch has not yet been washed, it will shrink and tear the piece of clothing, making the hole worse than it was to begin with. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν; εἰ δὲ μή αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ, τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται.

This verse is a parable, as well as verse 22. (See: Parables)

Mark 2:22

ἀσκοὺς

These were bags made out of animal skins where wine was stored. If they were old and used, and someone put new wine in them, they would tear. This would happen because the wine expands as it sits for a long time and the old wine skins could no longer stretch with the wine. (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-explicit/01.md)

ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς

In this phrase, it is assumed that new wine is being poured into fresh wineskins. If this would be confusing in your language, you can clarify. Alternate translation: “But you should pour new wine into new wineskins” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 2:23

τίλλοντες τοὺς στάχυας

Plucking grain in others’ fields and eating it was not considered stealing. It was actually a commandment of the Law to leave the grain on the edges of your field standing so that those who were hungry could eat it. The question was whether it was lawful to do this on the Sabbath. If this would be misunderstood In your culture, you can clarify. Alternate translation: plucking heads of grain, as the Law permitted” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοὺς στάχυας

The heads are the topmost part of the wheat plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were picking the heads of grain to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. This can be worded to show the full meaning. Alternate translation: “picking heads of grain and eating the seeds”. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food that you have to remove from a shell or casing. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 2:24

ἴδε, τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν?

The Pharisees ask Jesus a question to condemn him. You can translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “Look! They are breaking the Jewish law concerning the Sabbaths.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἴδε

“Look at this” or “Listen.” This is a word used to get the attention of someone to show them something. If there is a word in your language that is used to draw a person’s attention to something, you could use that here. (See: Exclamations)

Mark 2:25

οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ

You can state this (1) as a command. Alternate translation: “Remember what you read about what David did” or (2) as a statement. Alternate translation: “you have read that David did the same thing when he and those with him were hungry” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ

Jesus refers to reading about David in the Old Testament. You can translate this showing the implicit information. Alternate translation: “Have you not read in the scriptures what David did” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν

had need and hungry are two words that being used to express the same idea. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can combine the two words in your translation. Alternate translation: “When he was in need of food” (See: Doublet)

Mark 2:26

τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως

This refers to the 12 loaves of bread that were placed on a golden table in the tabernacle or temple building as a sacrifice to God during Old Testament times. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ

Jesus is figuratively describing the tabernacle as the house of God. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-metaphor/01.md)

Mark 2:27

τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο

Jesus makes clear why God established the Sabbath. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God made the Sabbath for mankind” (See: Active or Passive)

τὸν ἄνθρωπον

man is a word which refers to both men and women. (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

τὸν ἄνθρωπον

man is a generic noun. It does not refer to any specific person, but to mankind as a whole. (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον

The words was made are understood from the previous phrase. They can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “man was not made for the Sabbath” or “God did not make man for the Sabbath” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 2:28

Son of Man is a common title given to Jesus. See the introduction to the book for a detailed explanation of the title.

There are two major interpretations of this passage. (1) Many think that Jesus is here appealing to his heavenly authority to speak about the Sabbath day to the religious leaders. Alternate translation: “Therefore, I, the Son of Man, am Lord of the Sabbath.” (2) son of man is a popular title used in the Old Testament to refer to a human being. Jesus could be saying (functioning as the conclusion to the previous verse) that mankind has authority over the Sabbath, and that the Sabbath does not have authority over mankind. Alternate translation: “Therefore, mankind has authority over the Sabbath”.

Mark 3

Mark 3 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Sabbath

It was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was “work,” so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God)

“Blasphemy against the Spirit”

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: blasphemy, blaspheme, blasphemous and Holy Spirit, Spirit of God, Spirit of the Lord, Spirit)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

Brothers and Sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: brother)

Mark 3:2

ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ

If Jesus were to heal the man that day, the Pharisees would accuse him of breaking the law by the working on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “so that they could accuse him of wrongdoing” or “so that they could accuse him of breaking the law of Moses” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ

This phrase tells the reader why the Pharisees were watching Jesus. Alternate translation: “They were doing this so that they could accuse him of working on the jewish rest day” (See: Connect — Goal (Purpose) Relationship)

Mark 3:3

ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μέσον

midst here is referring to the group people who were gathered inside of the synagogue. If this would be confusing in your language, you can be explicit. Alternate translation: “Stand up in front of all of those meeting here”

Mark 3:4

ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι?

Jesus said this to challenge them. He wanted them to acknowledge that it is lawful to obey God and do good on the Sabbath. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you may state these questions as sentences. Alternate translation: “It is allowed for people to do good on the sabbath, but not to do evil. Likewise it is allowed to save someone on the sabbath, but not to kill” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι

Do the laws that God gave Moses permit people to do good on the day of rest, or to do evil and Do the laws permit us to save a person’s life on the day of rest, or permit us to refuse to help a person and let them die are similar in meaning, except that the second is more extreme. The two phrases are trying to make the same point. (See: Parallelism)

ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι

The phrase is it lawful is assumed here. If this would be misunderstood, you may clarify and add it again for the second phrase. Alternate translation: “is it lawful to save a life, or is it lawful to kill” (See: Ellipsis)

ψυχὴν

This refers to physical life and is a metonym for a person. Alternate translation: “someone from dying” or “someone’s life” (See: Metonymy)

Mark 3:5

τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν

hardness of heart is a common metaphor which describes stubbornness towards God’s will. The Pharisees were stubborn about their unwillingness to do anything on the Sabbath — whether good or evil. They therefore leave this man to suffer with his crippled hand. Alternate Translation: “by their stubbornness” (See: Metaphor)

ἀπεκατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ

You can state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus restored his hand” or “Jesus healed his hand” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 3:6

τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν

This is the name of a group of people who supported the ruler Herod Antipas. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 3:8

τῆς Ἰδουμαίας

This is the region, previously known as Edom, which covered the southern half of the province of Judea.

ὅσα ἐποίει

This refers to the miracles Jesus was performing. Alternate translation: “the great miracles that Jesus had performed” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 3:9

εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν

As the large crowd was pushing forward toward Jesus, he was in danger of being crushed by them. They would not crush him intentionally. It was because there were so many people. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 3:10

πολλοὺς γὰρ ἐθεράπευσεν, ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας

This tells why so many people were crowding around Jesus that he thought they might crush him. Alternate translation: “For, because Jesus had healed many people, everyone pressed against him so that they might touch him” See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας

They did this because they believed that touching Jesus would make them well. This can be expressed clearly. Alternate translation: “all the sick people pushed forward eagerly trying to touch him so that they might be healed” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ

To press against someone means that they are drawing very close to them. Usually this has to do with crowds surrounding someone. If this would be misunderstood, think of a way in your language which this could be expressed. Alternate translation: “so a large number of people surrounded him closely” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 3:11

προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ ἔκραζον λέγοντα

Here, they refers to the unclean spirits. It is they who are causing the people they possess to do things. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “they caused the people they were possessing to fall down before him and to cry out to him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ ἔκραζον λέγοντα

The spirits knew who Jesus is without Him telling them. This is because Jesus is God, and He is the one who created them. If readers would misunderstand this, you can make it explicit. Alternate translation “they caused the people whom they controlled to fall down because of Jesus’ power, and they cried out” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ

This is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

Mark 3:13

ἀναβαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος

he goes up on the mountain does not refer to a specific mountain. This phrase is an idiom which means that Jesus traveled to the mountainous regions. If this would be misunderstood, you may state it explicitly. Alternate Translation: “Jesus went up into the mountainous regions” or “Jesus went up into area with many hills” (See: Idiom)

Mark 3:16

καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα

Some manuscripts do not include the words and he appointed the Twelve. This is likely original, but some writers decided to leave it out because verse 14 has a similar phrase. (See: Textual Variants)

καὶ ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον

Simon is the first man listed. All of the names listed here are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον

In ancient times, people changed their names to show that they are changing something about them. Here, Jesus changes Peter’s name to show that Peter is now one of his followers. This also happens in the next verse. If this would be misunderstood, think of something in your language that people do to signify a major change in their lives. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 3:17

ὀνόματα Βοανηργές, ὅ ἐστιν υἱοὶ βροντῆς

Jesus called them this because they were like thunder. Alternate translation: “the name Boanerges, which means men who are like thunder” or “the name Boanerges, which means thunder men” (See: INVALID translate/translate-metaphor)

Mark 3:19

ὃς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτόν

This note tells the reader that Judas Iscariot stood out from the rest of the Apostles, in that he later would betray the Lord. Alternate translation: “who later betrayed Jesus” (See: Background Information)

Mark 3:20

καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς οἶκον

This is likely the same house which was mentioned previously. See note on 2:1

μὴ δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς μηδὲ ἄρτον φαγεῖν

The word bread represents food. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples could not eat at all” or “they could not eat anything” (See: Synecdoche)

Mark 3:21

ἔλεγον γὰρ

Here, they could refer to: (1) his relatives. (2) some people in the crowd.

ἐξέστη

This idiom describes how they think he is acting. Alternate translation: “He is crazy” (See: Idiom)

Mark 3:23

πῶς δύναται Σατανᾶς Σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλειν?

Jesus asked this rhetorical question in response to the scribes saying that he cast out demons by Beelzebul. This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Satan cannot cast out himself!” or “Satan does not go against his own evil spirits!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Σατανᾶν

The name Satan is used here to refer to Satan’s “kingdom”, and not just him. If a reader would misunderstand this, you can make it explicit. Alternate translation: “his own power” or “his own evil spirits” (See: Synecdoche)

Mark 3:24

καὶ ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ βασιλεία ἐκείνη

Jesus uses this parable to show why scribes are wrong to think Jesus is controlled by Satan. He is saying that if a group of people are not united, they will not be able to exist together. (See: Parables)

ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ

The word kingdom refers to the people who live in the kingdom. Alternate translation: “If the people who live in a kingdom are divided against each other” (See: Synecdoche)

οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι

This phrase is a metaphor meaning that the people will no longer be united and they will fall. Alternate translation: “will no longer exist” (See: Metaphor)

οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι

You can state this phrase in positive form. Alternate translation: “will fall” (See: Litotes)

Mark 3:25

οἰκία

This is a metonym for the people who live in a house. Alternate translation: “a family” or “a household” (See: Metonymy)

καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι

This is another parable which shows the religious leaders why they are wrong. (See: Parables)

καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι

This parable is identical to the previous one. If the repetition would confuse readers, you can use one or the other. (See: Parallelism)

Mark 3:26

εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη

The word himself is a reflexive pronoun that refers back to Satan. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

καὶ εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη, οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει

While this parable is similar to the previous two, it would be good to keep it, as the parable refers back to the original problem. (See: Parallelism)

οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει

This is a metaphor meaning he will fall and not endure. Alternate translation: “he will cease to be united and will be finished” or “he cannot endure and has come to an end” or “he will fall and come to an end” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 3:27

ἀλλ’ οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ εἰσελθὼν τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον τὸν ἰσχυρὸν δήσῃ; καὶ τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει.

This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits, and saving the people whom he had controlled previously. (See: Parables)

οὐδεὶς

This doe not refer to a specific person, but to people in general. (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

Mark 3:28

ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true”

τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων

Here, the phrase sons of men is an idiom which means the people. Alternate translation: “of people” or “of mankind” (See: Idiom)

Mark 3:29

ὃς δ’ ἂν

Whoever here does not refer to anyone, but is a generic word for a person. (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

Mark 3:30

πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει

This is an idiom that means to be possessed by an unclean spirit. Alternate translation: “an unclean spirit is controlling him” (See: Idiom)

Mark 3:31

καὶ ἔρχονται ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ

Alternate Translation: “Then Jesus’ mother and brothers arrived”

Mark 3:33

τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου?

Jesus uses this question to teach the people that he considers those who follow God to be his beloved These are people who belong to his spiritual family. He has not forgotten who his family members are. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you may make it explicit. Alternate translation: “I will tell you who I consider to be my mother and brothers” or “I will tell you who I love as a mother or brother” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου

Jesus is using the words mother and brother here not referring to biological relatives, but to those whom he loves and whom obey God. (See: Kinship)

Mark 3:35

ὃς

whoever does not refer to any specific person, but to any person who does these things. (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν

This is a metaphor that means Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: “that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 4

Mark 4 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Mark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.

Mark 4:1

ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἐμβάντα, καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ

Jesus stepped into the boat because the crowd was so big that it would have been very difficult for them all to hear him. If this would not be clear in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because the crowd was so large, Jesus went out onto a boat so the crowd could hear his teaching.” See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

Mark 4:2

καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς ἐν παραβολαῖς πολλά, καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ

Mark provides this background information about Jesus’ actions to help readers understand what happens while Jesus is on the boat. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: Background Information)

Mark 4:3

ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων σπεῖραι

Jesus teaches the crowd about what happens when different people hear Jesus’ teaching. (See: Parables)

ἀκούετε

This is an imperative which Jesus speaks to get his listeners to hear what he is about to say. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “Listen to what I am about to say!” (See: Imperatives — Other Uses)

Mark 4:4

ἐν τῷ σπείρειν, ὃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν

Many cultures, when they plant seeds, bury them after planting them to protect them from animals that eat seeds. The seeds on path did not have a chance to be hidden from the birds, so they ate them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As we was scattering the seeds, some of them fell unprotected from animals onto the path. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 4:5

καὶ ἄλλο ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὸ πετρῶδες

In this verse and in the following 4 verses, the word other is referring to seeds that fell in different areas as the sower was planting. If this would be misunderstood, see the UST. (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 4:6

ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος

the sun rose is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: Idiom)

ἐκαυματίσθη

If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “it scorched the plants” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 4:7

ἄλλο ἔπεσεν

See the note on 4:5

Mark 4:8

αὐξανόμενα, καὶ ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν

The amount of grain produced by each plant is being compared to the single seed from which it grew. Ellipsis is used here to shorten the phrases but they can be written out. Alternate translation: “Some plants bore 30 times as much grain, some produced 60 times as much grain, and some produced 100 times as much grain” (See: Ellipsis)

τριάκοντα…ἑξήκοντα…ἑκατόν

“thirty … sixty … a hundred.” These may be written as numerals. (See: Numbers)

Mark 4:9

ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω

The phrase has ears here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Whoever is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: Metonymy)

ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω

Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: First, Second or Third Person)

Mark 4:10

ὅτε ἐγένετο κατὰ μόνας

This does not mean that Jesus was completely alone. Rather, it means that the crowds were gone and Jesus was only with the twelve and some of his other close followers.

Mark 4:11

ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον δέδοται τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I have given you the mystery of the kingdom of God” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐκείνοις…τοῖς ἔξω

to those who are outside refers to the people who are not a part of Jesus’ group of disciples. If this would be misunderstood, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those who are outside of this group” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 4:12

βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν

see here is a metaphor for being spiritually blind. Alternate translation: “When they see my works, they will not know why I am doing them” (See: Metaphor)

ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν; καὶ ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι καὶ μὴ συνιῶσιν

Mark is quoting Jesus, and Jesus is quoting the prophet Isaiah. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. For clarity, you could also indicate the source of the words that Jesus is quoting. Alternate translation: “so that as the prophet Isaiah said, though they see, they will not perceive, and though they hear, they will not understand” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-quotesinquotes/01.md)

μήποτε ἐπιστρέψωσιν

turn is a metaphor for “repent.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state it in plain language. Alternate translation: “so that they would not repent” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 4:13

οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, καὶ πῶς πάσας τὰς παραβολὰς γνώσεσθε?

Jesus used Do you not understand this parable? and how will you understand all the parables? to show how disappointed he was that his disciples could not understand his parable. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “If you cannot understand this parable, think about how hard it will be for you to understand all of the other parables” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 4:14

ὁ σπείρων τὸν λόγον σπείρει

If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Marks’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “The one sowing the seed represents a person who proclaims God’s message to others” (See: Metaphor)

τὸν λόγον σπείρει

Here, the word means the gospel which Jesus was proclaiming. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “sowed the message which Jesus was proclaiming” or “sowed the gospel message” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν λόγον σπείρει

Sowing the message represents teaching it. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the one who teaches people God’s message” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 4:15

οὗτοι δέ εἰσιν οἱ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν

If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “Some people represent the instance when the seeds fell along the path. ” (See: Metaphor)

οὗτοι

These is a generic noun for people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “Certain people” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

Mark 4:16

καὶ οὗτοί εἰσιν ὁμοίως οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι

If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “Some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed upon the rocky soil. ” (See: Metaphor)

οὗτοί

See the note on these in the previous verse. (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι

If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the ones which the sower sowed on the rocky soil” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 4:17

οὐκ ἔχουσιν ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς

This is a comparison to young plants that have very shallow roots. This metaphor means that the people were first excited when they received the word, but they were not strongly devoted to it. If your readers would not understand what they have no root in themselves means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “they did not fully grasp the message” (See: Metaphor)

οὐκ…ῥίζαν

They have no root in themselves is an exaggeration to emphasize how small the roots were. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. (See: Hyperbole)

σκανδαλίζονται

to stumble is an idiom which means to stop believing. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they stop believing in God’s message” (See: Idiom) (See: Metaphor)

Mark 4:18

ἄλλοι εἰσὶν οἱ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπειρόμενοι

If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “Some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed into the thorny plants.” (See: Metaphor)

ἄλλοι

See note about others on 4:15 (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

Mark 4:19

αἱ μέριμναι τοῦ αἰῶνος

Alternate translation: “the worries in this life” or “the concerns about this present life”

εἰσπορευόμεναι, συνπνίγουσιν τὸν λόγον

Jesus uses the metaphor choke to depict what these peoples’ desires to to them. Similarly to how a thorny plant chokes a baby plant, worldly desire chokes faith. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “did not allow the faith to grow” (See: Metaphor)

ἄκαρπος γίνεται

unfruitful is a metaphor used to depict whether one is a follower of Jesus or not. If a tree is fruitful, it is living and healthy. If it is not fruitful, it is dead or unhealthy. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the person does not do good works showing that they follow Jesus” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 4:20

ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλὴν σπαρέντες

If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “Some people represent the seeds which the farmer sowed upon the good soil. ” (See: Metaphor)

ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν

This refers to the grain that the plants produce. Alternate translation: “some produce 30 grains, some produce 60 grains, and some produce 100 grains” or “some produce 30 times the grain that was sown, some produce 60 times the grain that was sown, and some produce 100 times the grain that was sown” (See: Ellipsis)

τριάκοντα…ἑξήκοντα…ἑκατόν

You can state the numbers as text. Alternate translation: “thirty … sixty … a hundred” (See: Numbers)

Mark 4:21

αὐτοῖς

Them could also possibly be referring to (1) the crowd. Alternate translation: “the crowd”. or (2) if you do not know, you can make it vague. Alternate translation: “them”

μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην?

Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You certainly do not bring a light inside the house to put it under a basket, or under a bed!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην

Mark mentions two household items here for the sake of emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Doublet)

Mark 4:22

οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν

You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For everything that is hidden will be made known, and everything that is secret will come out into to open” (See: Litotes)

οὐ…ἐστιν κρυπτὸν…οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον

there is nothing that is hidden…there is nothing that is secret Both of the phrases have the same meaning. Jesus is emphasizing that everything that is secret will be made known. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Nothing is hidden that will not be revealed?” (See: Parallelism)

Mark 4:23

εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω

See how your translated this in 4:09

Mark 4:24

ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς

See how you translated 4:21

ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε

This is a metaphor in which Jesus speaks of “understanding” as if it were “measuring.” If your readers would not understand, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “The one who thinks carefully about the things I have said, God will allow him to understand even more” (See: Metaphor)

μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν

If it would be more natural in your language, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will measure that amount for you, and he will add it to you” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 4:25

δοθήσεται αὐτῷ…ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτο

If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to him God will give more … from him God will take away” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 4:26

οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ

Jesus tells the people parables to explain the kingdom of God. (See: Parables)

ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον

Jesus likens the kingdom of God to a man who may throw his seed. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God grows like when a man throws seed on the ground” (See: Simile)

ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς

The word man is not speaking of any specific person, but people who scatter seed in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “As people who scatter seed upon the ground” (See: Generic Noun Phrases)

Mark 4:28

πρῶτον…εἶτα…εἶτα

These words show that this happened one after another. Make sure that this is clear to your audience in your translation. Alternate translation: “First, the stalks appeared. After this, the heads appeared. Finally, the mature grain in the heads” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

Mark 4:29

εὐθὺς ἀποστέλλει τὸ δρέπανον

Here, the sickle is a metonym that stands for the farmer or the people whom the farmer sends out to harvest the grain. Alternate translation: “he immediately goes into the field with a sickle to harvest the grain” or “he immediately sends people with sickles into the field to harvest the grain” (See: Metonymy)

δρέπανον

A sickle is a curved blade or a sharp hook used to cut tall crops down to the ground to be harvested. If this would be misunderstood, use a tool in your language that is used to do this job.

ὅτι παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός

Here the phrase has come is an idiom for the grain being ripe for harvest. Alternate translation: “because it was time for the farmers to harvest the grain” (See: Idiom)

Mark 4:30

πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν?

Jesus asked this question to cause his hearers to get the listeners attention, as he was about to speak another parable about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “With this parable I can explain what the kingdom of God is like.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 4:31

ὅταν σπαρῇ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “when someone sows it” or “when someone plants it” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 4:32

καὶ ποιεῖ κλάδους μεγάλους

The mustard tree is described as causing its branches to grow large. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with large branches” (See: Personification)

Mark 4:33

καὶ τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς, ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον, καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν

This verse marks the end of this section of Jesus’ parables. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: End of Story)

Mark 4:34

χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς

Luke uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Litotes)

ἐπέλυεν πάντα

Here, everything does not actually mean everything, but rather, all of his parables which he had spoken. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this clearly. Alternate translation: “he explained all his parables” (See: Hyperbole)

Mark 4:38

οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα?

The disciples asked this question to convey their fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you need to pay attention to what is happening; we are all about to die!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἀπολλύμεθα

The word we includes the disciples and Jesus. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Mark 4:39

σιώπα, πεφίμωσο

These two phrases are similar and used to emphasize what Jesus wanted the wind and the sea to do. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Be calm!” (See: Doublet)

Mark 4:40

τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν

Jesus asks these questions to make his disciples consider why they are afraid when he is with them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be afraid. You need to have more faith.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 4:41

τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ?

The disciples ask this question in amazement at what Jesus did. This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “This man is not like ordinary men; even the wind and the sea obey him!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 5

Mark 5 General Notes

Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“Talitha, koum”

The words Talitha, koum (Mark 5:41) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

Mark 5:1

καὶ ἦλθον εἰς τὸ πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης, εἰς τὴν χώραν τῶν Γερασηνῶν

This verse acts as an introduction to the next story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After this, they came to the other side of the Sea of Galilee, to the region where the Geresenes lived” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

ἦλθον

Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: Go and Come)

τῶν Γερασηνῶν

This name refers to the people who live in Gerasa. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 5:2

ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ

This is an idiom meaning that the man is controlled by the unclean spirit. Alternate translation: “that an unclean spirit controlled” (See: Idiom)

Mark 5:4

διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν πολλάκις πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι δεδέσθαι, καὶ διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἴσχυεν αὐτὸν δαμάσαι

This verse and the next verse function as background information to tell the reader about this man who was controlled by an evil spirit. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Background Information)

αὐτὸν πολλάκις…δεδέσθαι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People had bound him many times” (See: Active or Passive)

τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he shattered his shackles” (See: Active or Passive)

πέδαις

shackles are pieces of metal that people wrap around the arms and legs of prisoners. The shackles are then attach with chains to objects that do not move so the prisoners cannot move. Think of an object in your culture that is used to constrain people. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Mark 5:6

καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν, ἔδραμεν καὶ προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ

After having seen Jesus the man then ran to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After the man saw Jesus from a distance, he then ran to him and bowed down before him” (See: Connect — Sequential Time Relationship)

Mark 5:7

The information in these two verses may be reordered to present the events in the order that they happened, as in the UST. (See: Order of Events)

τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου?

The unclean spirit asks this question out of fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Leave me alone, Jesus, Son of the Most High God! There is no reason for you to interfere with me.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου

This is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

Mark 5:9

λέγει αὐτῷ, Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν.

The spirit who is speaking is speaking on behalf of all of the spirits who are possessing the man. we here includes him and all of the other spirits. Make sure that this is understood in your translation. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν

A legion is the name of a large group of Roman soldiers. The unclean spirit uses this name to tell Jesus that they many. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation “My name is Legion. This is our name because there are many of us” (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 5:10

καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτὸν πολλὰ, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὰ ἀποστείλῃ ἔξω τῆς χώρας

Mark inserts this verse and the following verse to give important information about what Jesus does with the spirits. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation. (See: Background Information)

Mark 5:13

ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς

It may be helpful to state clearly what Jesus allowed them to do. Alternate translation: “Jesus allowed the unclean spirits to do what they asked permission to do” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὡς δισχίλιοι

“about two thousand pigs” (See: Numbers)

ἐξελθόντα

Your language may say “gone” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone out” (See: Go and Come)

Mark 5:15

τὸν λεγεῶνα

This was the name of the many demons that were in the man. See how you translated this in Mark 5:9.

σωφρονοῦντα

This is an idiom meaning that he is thinking clearly. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “being of a normal mind” or “thinking clearly” (See: Idiom)

Mark 5:18

ἵνα μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Mark 5:19

καὶ οὐκ ἀφῆκεν αὐτόν

Jesus was not allowing the an into the boat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But he did not allow the man to come with them in the boat” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 5:20

τῇ Δεκαπόλει

This is the name of a region that means “Ten Cities.” It is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. (See: How to Translate Names)

πάντες ἐθαύμαζον

It may be helpful to state who the people were that were marveling. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 5:22

Ἰάειρος

This is the name of a man. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἔρχεται εἷς τῶν ἀρχισυναγώγων

Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “one of the leaders of the synagogue went” (See: Go and Come)

Mark 5:23

ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας

lay your hands often refers to a prophet or teacher placing his hand on someone and imparting either healing or a blessing. In this case, Jarius is asking Jesus to heal his daughter. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you might heal her” or “you might lay your hands on her to heal her” (See: Idiom)

ἵνα σωθῇ

If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that you might heal her” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 5:25

καὶ γυνὴ οὖσα

This introduces the woman as a new character in the story. Consider how new people are introduced into a story in your language. (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος δώδεκα ἔτη

The woman did not have an open wound. Rather, her monthly flow of blood would not stop. Your language may have a polite way to refer to this condition. (See: Euphemism)

δώδεκα ἔτη

“for twelve years” (See: Numbers)

Mark 5:27

τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ

She had heard reports about how Jesus healed people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus healed people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 5:28

ἔλεγεν γὰρ

This verse tells the reader that the woman had determined to touch his clothes in her mind before she actually touched Jesus’ cloak. Think of a way in your language which makes it apparent that this is the reason why she touches Jesus’ cloak. (See: Connect — Reason-and-Result Relationship)

σωθήσομαι

If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 5:29

ἴαται ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος

If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sickness had left her” or “she was no longer sick” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 5:30

τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν

When the woman touched Jesus, Jesus felt his power healing her. Jesus himself did not lose any of his power to heal people when he healed her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his power went out from him and healed someone” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 5:33

ἡ δὲ γυνὴ, φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα

Both words fear and trembling are similar words used to show that the woman was very afraid. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “The woman was very afraid” (See: Doublet)

εἶπεν αὐτῷ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν

The phrase the whole truth refers to how she had touched him and became well. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “told him the whole truth about how she had touched him” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 5:34

θυγάτηρ

Jesus was using this term figuratively to refer to the woman as a believer. She was not actually his daughter. Make sure this is understood by your readers. (See: Kinship)

Mark 5:35

τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον?

This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is useless to bother the teacher any longer.” or “There no need to bother the teacher any longer.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἡ θυγάτηρ σου ἀπέθανεν; τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον?

your daughter died explains why he asks the question here. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Why trouble the teacher any longer? For your daughter died” (See: Information Structure)

Mark 5:39

τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε?

Jesus asked this question to help them see their lack of faith. This may be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is not a time to be upset and crying.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει

The words The child are assumed in the second phrase. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The child is not dead, but the child is sleeping” (See: Ellipsis)

τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει

sleep here refers to death. Jesus is likely using it to mean a temporary end to the girls life, but not a permanent end. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “The child is not permanently dead, but she has died for a short time” (See: Euphemism)

Mark 5:41

ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ!

This is an Aramaic sentence which Jesus spoke to the little girl in her language. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

Mark 5:42

ἦν…ἐτῶν δώδεκα

“she was twelve years old” (See: Numbers)

καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνέστη τὸ κοράσιον καὶ περιεπάτει, ἦν γὰρ ἐτῶν δώδεκα

Mark includes this information to help the readers understand how it was that she immediately rose up and began walking. She was able to get up and walk because she was old enough to do so. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And immediately the little girl rose up and was walking. She was able to do this because she was 12 years old” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 5:43

καὶ εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν

You can state this as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “and he told them, ‘Give her something to eat’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Mark 6

Mark 6 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

“Anointed with oil”

In the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them.

Mark 6:1

Jesus returns to his hometown, where he is not accepted.

τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ

This refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up and where his family lived. This does not mean that he owned land there.

Mark 6:2

τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ

This question, which contains passive construction, can be asked in active form. Alternate translation: “what is this wisdom that he has gained?”

διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ γινόμεναι

This phrase emphasizes that Jesus himself does the miracles. Alternate translation: “that he himself works”

Mark 6:3

οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τέκτων, ὁ υἱὸς τῆς Μαρίας, καὶ ἀδελφὸς Ἰακώβου, καὶ Ἰωσῆτος, καὶ Ἰούδα, καὶ Σίμωνος? καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ἡμᾶς?

These questions can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “He is just an ordinary carpenter! We know him and his family. We know Mary his mother. We know his younger brothers James, Joses, Judas and Simon. And his younger sisters also live here with us.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Ἰακώβου…Ἰωσῆτος…Ἰούδα…Σίμωνος

These are the names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 6:4

αὐτοῖς

“to the crowd”

οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ

This sentence uses a double negative to create emphasis of the positive equivalent. Alternate translation: “A prophet is always honored, except” or “The only place a prophet is not honored is” (See: Double Negatives)

Mark 6:5

ὀλίγοις ἀρρώστοις, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας

Prophets and teachers would put their hands on people in order to heal them or bless them. In this case, Jesus was healing people.

Mark 6:7

Jesus’ instructions in verses 8 and 9 can be reordered to separate what he told the disciples to do from what he told them not to do, as in the UST. (See: Verse Bridges)

Jesus sends his disciples out in sets of two to preach and to heal.

προσκαλεῖται τοὺς δώδεκα

Here the word called means that he summoned the Twelve to come to him.

δύο δύο

“2 by 2” or “in pairs” (See: Numbers)

Mark 6:8

μὴ ἄρτον

Here, bread is a synecdoche for food in general. Alternate translation: “no food” (See: Synecdoche)

Mark 6:10

ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς

“Jesus said to the Twelve”

ἐκεῖ μένετε ἕως ἂν ἐξέλθητε ἐκεῖθεν

Here, remain represents daily going back to that house to eat and sleep there. Alternate translation: “eat and sleep in that house until you leave that place” (See: Metonymy)

Mark 6:11

εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς

It may be helpful to explain how this action was a testimony against them. Alternate translation: “as a testimony to them. By doing that, you will be testifying that they did not welcome you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 6:12

ἐξελθόντες

It may be helpful to state that they went out to various towns. Alternate translation: “having gone out to various towns” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐκήρυξαν

The word they refers to the Twelve and does not include Jesus.

Mark 6:13

δαιμόνια πολλὰ ἐξέβαλλον

It may be helpful to state that they cast the demons out of people. Alternate translation: “they were casting many demons out of people” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 6:14

When Herod hears about Jesus’ miracles, he worries, thinking that someone has raised John the Baptist from the dead. (Herod had caused John the Baptist to be killed.)

ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἡρῴδης

The word this refers to everything that Jesus and his disciples had been doing in various towns, including casting out demons and healing people.

ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται

Some people were saying that Jesus was John the Baptist. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “Some were saying, ‘He is John the Baptist who has been raised” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται

Here, raised is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist has been caused to live again” (See: Idiom)

Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has caused John the Baptist to live again” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 6:15

ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν

It may be helpful to state why some people thought he was Elijah. Alternate translation: “Some others said, ‘He is Elijah, whom God promised to send back again.’” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 6:16

In verse 17 the author begins to give background information about Herod and why he beheaded John the Baptist. (See: Background Information)

ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα

Here Herod uses the word I to refer to himself. The word I is a metonym for Herod’s soldiers. Alternate translation: “whom I commanded my soldiers to behead” (See: Metonymy)

ἠγέρθη

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “has become alive again” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 6:17

αὐτὸς…ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ

You can state this clearly that Herod sent his soldiers to put John in prison. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John and had them bind him in prison” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

διὰ Ἡρῳδιάδα

“because of Herodias”

τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ

Herod’s brother Philip is not the same Philip who was an evangelist in the book of Acts or the Philip who was one of Jesus’ twelve disciples. (See: How to Translate Names)

ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν

“because Herod had married her”

Mark 6:19

ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο

Herodias is the subject of this phrase and she is a metonym as she wants someone else to execute John. Alternate translation: “she wanted someone to kill him, but she could not have him killed” (See: Metonymy)

Mark 6:20

ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης ἐφοβεῖτο τὸν Ἰωάννην, εἰδὼς

These two clauses can be linked differently to show more clearly why Herod feared John. Alternate translation: “for Herod feared John because he knew” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον

“because Herod knew that John was a righteous and holy man”

ἀκούσας αὐτοῦ

“having listened to John”

Mark 6:21

The author continues to give background information about Herod and the beheading of John the Baptist. (See: Background Information)

Ἡρῴδης τοῖς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ δεῖπνον ἐποίησεν, τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ

Here, Herod is a metonym for his servants whom he would have commanded to prepare a meal. Alternate translation: “Herod had his servants prepare a dinner for his officials” (See: Metonymy)

τοῖς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ δεῖπνον

a formal meal or banquet to celebrate his birthday

Mark 6:22

τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος

The word herself is a reflexive pronoun used to emphasize that it was significant that it was Herodias’ own daughter who danced at the dinner. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

εἰσελθούσης

“having come into the room”

Mark 6:23

ἐάν με αἰτήσῃς, δώσω σοι, ἕως ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου

“I will give you up to half of what I own and rule, if you ask for it”

Mark 6:24

ἐξελθοῦσα

“after she went out of the room”

Mark 6:25

πίνακι

“a board” or “a large wooden dish”

Mark 6:26

διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμένους

You can state clearly the content of the oath, and the relationship between the oath and the dinner guests. Alternate translation: “because his dinner guests had heard him make the oath that he would give her anything she asked for” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 6:28

ἐπὶ πίνακι

“on a tray”

Mark 6:29

ἀκούσαντες, οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ

“John’s disciples, having heard that this had happened”

Mark 6:30

After the disciples return from preaching and healing, they go somewhere to be alone, but there are many people who come to hear Jesus teach. When it becomes late, he feeds the people and then sends everyone away while he prays alone.

Mark 6:31

ἔρημον τόπον

a place where there are no people

ἦσαν…οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες πολλοί

This means that people were continually coming to the apostles and then going away from them.

οὐδὲ…εὐκαίρουν

The word they refers to the apostles.

Mark 6:32

καὶ ἀπῆλθον

Here the word they includes both the apostles and Jesus.

Mark 6:33

εἶδον αὐτοὺς ὑπάγοντας, καὶ ἐπέγνωσαν πολλοί

“many people saw Jesus and the apostles leaving and recognized them”

πεζῇ

The people are going on foot by land, which contrasts with how the disciples went by boat.

Mark 6:34

εἶδεν πολὺν ὄχλον

“Jesus saw a great crowd”

ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα

Jesus compares the people to sheep who are confused when they do not have their shepherd to lead them. (See: Simile)

Mark 6:35

καὶ ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης

This means it was late in the day. Alternate translation: “And when it was getting late” or “And late in the afternoon” (See: Idiom)

ἔρημός ἐστιν ὁ τόπος

This refers to a place where there are no people. See how you translated this in Mark 6:31.

Mark 6:37

ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς

“But Jesus answered and said to his disciples”

ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν?

The disciples ask this question to say that there is no way they could afford to buy enough food for this crowd. Alternate translation: “We could not buy enough bread to feed this crowd, even if we had two hundred denarii!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

δηναρίων διακοσίων

The singular form of the word denarii is “denarius.” A denarius was a Roman silver coin worth one day’s wages. (See: Biblical Money)

δηναρίων διακοσίων

“two hundred denarii” (See: Numbers)

Mark 6:38

ἄρτους

lumps of bread dough that have been shaped and baked

Mark 6:39

τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ

Describe the grass with the color word used in your language for healthy grass, which may or may not be the color green.

Mark 6:40

πρασιαὶ, κατὰ ἑκατὸν καὶ κατὰ πεντήκοντα

This refers to the number of people in each of the groups. Alternate translation: “about fifty people in some groups and about a hundred people in other groups” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 6:41

ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν

This means that he looked up toward the sky, which is associated with the place where God lives.

εὐλόγησεν

“he spoke a blessing” or “he gave thanks”

τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας ἐμέρισεν πᾶσιν

“he divided the two fish so that everyone could have some”

Mark 6:43

ἦραν

This could mean: (1) the disciples took up the pieces. (2) the people took up the pieces.

κλάσματα δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα

“twelve baskets full of broken pieces of bread”

δώδεκα κοφίνων

“twelve baskets” (See: Numbers)

Mark 6:44

πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες

“five thousand men” (See: Numbers)

ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες τοὺς ἄρτους, πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες

The number of women and children was not counted. If it would not be understood that women and children were present, it can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “And there were 5,000 men who ate the loaves. They did not even count the women and children” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 6:45

εἰς τὸ πέραν

This refers to the Sea of Galilee. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: Ellipsis)

Βηθσαϊδάν

This is a town on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 6:46

ἀποταξάμενος αὐτοῖς

“when he had sent the people away”

Mark 6:48

A storm arises while the disciples are trying to cross the lake. Seeing Jesus walking on the water terrifies them. They do not understand how Jesus can calm the storm.

τετάρτην φυλακὴν

This is the time between 3 AM and sunrise. (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Mark 6:49

φάντασμά

the spirit of a dead person or some other kind of spirit

Mark 6:50

θαρσεῖτε…μὴ φοβεῖσθε

These two sentences are similar in meaning, emphasizing to his disciples that they did not need to be afraid. They can be combined into one if necessary. Alternate translation: “Do not be afraid of me!” (See: Parallelism)

Mark 6:51

λείαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἐξίσταντο

If you need to be more specific, it can stated what they were amazed by. Alternate translation: “they were completely amazed at what he had done” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 6:52

ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις

Here the phrase the loaves refers to when Jesus multiplied the loaves of bread. Alternate translation: “what it meant when Jesus multiplied the loaves of bread” or “what it meant when Jesus caused the few loaves to become many” (See: Metonymy)

ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη

A heart that has been hardened represents being too stubborn to understand. Alternate translation: “they were too stubborn to understand” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 6:53

When Jesus and his disciples arrive at Gennesaret in their boat, people see him and bring people for him to heal. This happens wherever they go.

Γεννησαρὲτ

This is the name of the region to the northwest of the Sea of Galilee. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 6:55

περιέδραμον ὅλην τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην

It may be helpful to state why they ran through the region. Alternate translation: “they ran throughout the whole district in order to tell others that Jesus was there” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

περιέδραμον…ἤκουον

The word they refers to the people who recognized Jesus, not to the disciples.

τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας

This phrase refers to people. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Mark 6:56

ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο

“wherever Jesus entered”

ἐτίθεσαν

Here, they refers to the people. It does not refer to Jesus’ disciples.

τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας

This phrase refers to people. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν

This could mean: (1) the sick were begging him. (2) the people were begging him.

ἅψωνται

The word they refers to the sick.

τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ

“the hem of his robe” or “the edge of his clothes”

ὅσοι ἂν

“all those who”

Mark 7

Mark 7 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

Hand washing

The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: law, law of Moses, law of Yahweh, law of God and clean, wash)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

“Ephphatha”

This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

Mark 7:1

Jesus rebukes the Pharisees and scribes.

συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν

“are gathered around Jesus”

Mark 7:2

In verses 3 and 4, the author gives background information about the Pharisees’ washing traditions in order to show why the Pharisees were bothered that Jesus’ disciples did not wash their hands before eating. (See: Background Information)

Verses 3 and 4 can be reordered in order to make it easier to understand, as in the UST. (See: Verse Bridges)

ἰδόντες

“the Pharisees and the scribes saw”

τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἀνίπτοις

The word unwashed explains why the disciples’ hands were defiled. It can be expressed in active form. Alternate translation: “that is, with hands that they had not washed” or “that is, that they had not washed their hands” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 7:3

τῶν πρεσβυτέρων

Jewish elders were leaders in their communities and were also judges for the people.

Mark 7:4

χαλκίων

“copper kettles” or “metal containers”

Mark 7:5

διὰ τί οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, ἀλλὰ κοιναῖς χερσὶν ἐσθίουσιν τὸν ἄρτον?

Walk in here is a metaphor for “obey.” (See: Metaphor)

διὰ τί οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, ἀλλὰ κοιναῖς χερσὶν ἐσθίουσιν τὸν ἄρτον?

The Pharisees and scribes asked this question to challenge Jesus’ authority. This can be written as two statements. Alternate translation: “Your disciples disobey the traditions of our elders! They should wash their hands using our rituals.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἄρτον

This is a synecdoche, representing food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: Synecdoche)

Mark 7:6

Here Jesus quotes the prophet Isaiah, who had written scripture many years earlier.

τοῖς χείλεσίν

Here, lips is a metonym for speaking. Alternate translation: “by what they say” (See: Metonymy)

ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ

Here, heart refers to a person’s thoughts or emotions. (See: Metonymy)

ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ

This is a way of saying the people are not truly devoted to God. Alternate translation: “but they do not really love me” (See: Idiom)

Mark 7:7

μάτην δὲ σέβονταί με

“But they offer me useless worship”

Mark 7:8

Jesus continues to rebuke the scribes and Pharisees.

ἀφέντες

having refused to obey

κρατεῖτε

“you hold strongly to” or “you only keep”

Mark 7:9

καλῶς ἀθετεῖτε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε

Jesus uses this ironic statement to rebuke his listeners for forsaking God’s commandment. Alternate translation: “You think you have done well in how you have rejected the commandment of God so you may keep your own traditions, but what you have done is not good at all” (See: Irony)

καλῶς ἀθετεῖτε

“How skillfully you reject”

Mark 7:10

ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα

“The one who curses his father”

θανάτῳ τελευτάτω

“he must surely be put to death”

ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα θανάτῳ τελευτάτω

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The authorities must surely execute a person who speaks evil about his father or mother” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 7:11

κορβᾶν…ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς

The tradition of the scribes said that once money or other things were promised to the temple, they could not be used for any other purpose.

κορβᾶν

Corban is a Hebrew word that refers to things that people promise to give to God. Translators normally transliterate it using the target language alphabet. Some translators translate its meaning, and then leave out Mark’s explanation of the meaning that follows. Alternate translation: “is a gift to God” or “belongs to God” (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον

This phrase explains the meaning of the Hebrew word “Corban.” You can state this in active form. Mark explained the meaning so that his non-Jewish readers could understand what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “I have given it to God” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 7:12

In verses 11 and 12, Jesus shows how the Pharisees teach people that they do not have to obey God’s commandment to honor their parents. In verse 11 Jesus tells what the Pharisees allow people to say about their possessions, and in verse 12 he tells how that shows the Pharisees’ attitude toward people helping their parents. This information can be reordered to first tell about the Pharisees’ attitude toward people helping their parents and then tell how that attitude is shown in what the Pharisees allow people to say about their possessions. (See: Verse Bridges)

οὐκέτι ἀφίετε αὐτὸν οὐδὲν ποιῆσαι τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί

By doing this, the Pharisees are allowing people not to provide for their parents, if they promise to give to God what they would have given to them. You can order these words before the words that begin with “Whatever help” in verse 11: “You no longer permit a person to do anything for his father or his mother after he says, ‘Whatever help you would have received from me is Corban.’ (Corban means ‘Given to God.’)” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 7:13

ἀκυροῦντες

cancelling or doing away with

παρόμοια τοιαῦτα πολλὰ ποιεῖτε

“you are doing may other things similar to this”

Mark 7:14

Jesus tells a parable to the crowd to help them understand what he has been saying to the scribes and Pharisees. (See: Parables)

προσκαλεσάμενος

“after Jesus had called”

ἀκούσατέ μου πάντες καὶ σύνετε

The words Listen and understand are related. Jesus uses them together to emphasize that his hearers should pay close attention to what he is saying. (See: Doublet)

σύνετε

It may be helpful to state what Jesus is telling them to understand. Alternate translation: “try to understand what I am about to tell you” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 7:15

οὐδέν…ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου

Jesus is speaking about what a person eats. This is in contrast to “what come out of the person.” Alternate translation: “nothing from outside a person that he can eat” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά

This refers to the things a person does or says. This is in contrast to “what is outside a person that enters into him.” Alternate translation: “It is what comes out of a person that he says or does” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 7:17

The disciples still do not understand what Jesus has just said to the scribes, Pharisees, and crowds. Jesus explains his meaning more thoroughly to them.

καὶ

The word And marks a break in the main story line. Jesus is now away from the crowd, in a house with his disciples.

Mark 7:18

Jesus begins to teach his disciples by asking a question.

οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε?

Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I would expect you to understand.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 7:19

Jesus finishes asking the question he is using to teach his disciples.

ὅτι οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, ἀλλ’ εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν, καὶ εἰς τὸν ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκπορεύεται?

This is the end of the question that begins with the words “Do you not see” in verse 18. Jesus uses this question to teach his disciples something they should already know. It can be expressed as a statement. “You should already understand that whatever enters into a person from outside cannot defile him, because it cannot go into his heart, but it goes into his stomach and then passes out into the latrine.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s inner being or mind. Here Jesus means that food does not affect a person’s character. Alternate translation: “it cannot go into his inner being” or “it cannot go into his mind” (See: Metonymy)

οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται

Here, it refers to what goes into a person; that is, what a person eats.

καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα

It may be helpful to explain clearly what this phrase means. Alternate translation: “all foods clean, meaning that people can eat any food without God considering the eater defiled” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 7:20

ἔλεγεν

“Jesus said”

τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον, ἐκεῖνο κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον

“What defiles a person is what comes out of him”

Mark 7:21

ἐκ τῆς καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων οἱ διαλογισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ ἐκπορεύονται

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s inner being or mind. Alternate translation: “out of the inner being of a person, come evil thoughts” or “out of the mind of a person, come evil thoughts” (See: Metonymy)

Mark 7:22

ἀσέλγεια

not controlling one’s lustful desires

Mark 7:23

ἔσωθεν ἐκπορεύεται

Here the word within describes a person’s heart. Alternate translation: “come from within a person’s heart” or “come from within a person’s thoughts” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 7:24

When Jesus goes away to Tyre, he heals the daughter of a Gentile woman who has extraordinary faith.

Mark 7:25

εἶχεν…πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον

This is an idiom meaning that she was possessed by the unclean spirit. Alternate translation: “being possessed by an unclean spirit” (See: Idiom)

προσέπεσεν

“knelt.” This is an act of honor and submission.

Mark 7:26

ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἦν Ἑλληνίς, Συροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει

The word But marks a break in the main story line, as this sentence gives us background information about the woman. (See: Background Information)

Συροφοινίκισσα

This is the name of the woman’s nationality. She was born in the Phoenician region in Syria. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 7:27

ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν καλόν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων, καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν

Here Jesus speaks about the Jews as if they are children and the Gentiles as if they are dogs. Alternate translation: “Let the children of Israel first be fed. For it is not right to take the children’s bread and throw it to the Gentiles, who are like dogs” (See: Metaphor)

ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “We must first feed the children of Israel” (See: Active or Passive)

ἄρτον

This refers to food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: Synecdoche)

τοῖς κυναρίοις

This refers to small dogs kept as pets.

Mark 7:29

ὕπαγε

Jesus was implying that she no longer needed to stay to ask him to help her daughter. He would do it. Alternate translation: “you may go now” or “you may go home in peace” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐξελήλυθεν τὸ δαιμόνιον, ἐκ τῆς θυγατρός σου

Jesus has caused the unclean spirit to leave the woman’s daughter. This can be expressed clearly. Alternate translation: “I have caused the evil spirit to leave your daughter” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 7:31

After healing people in Tyre, Jesus goes to the Sea of Galilee. There he heals a deaf man, which amazes the people.

ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῶν ὁρίων Τύρου

“having left the region of Tyre”

ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὁρίων

This could mean: (1) “up to a place in the region” as Jesus is at the sea in the region of the Decapolis. (2) “through part of the region” as Jesus went through the region of the Decapolis to get to the sea.

Δεκαπόλεως

This is the name of a region that means Ten Cities. It is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated this in Mark 5:20. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 7:32

φέρουσιν

“the people brought”

κωφὸν

“a person who was not able to hear”

παρακαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν ἵνα ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα

Prophets and teachers would put their hands on people in order to heal them or bless them. In this case, people are begging Jesus to heal a man. Alternate translation: “they begged Jesus to put his hand on the man to heal him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 7:33

ἀπολαβόμενος αὐτὸν

“after Jesus took the man aside”

ἔβαλεν τοὺς δακτύλους αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰ ὦτα αὐτοῦ

Jesus is putting his own fingers in the man’s ears.

πτύσας, ἥψατο τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ

Jesus spits and then touches the man’s tongue.

πτύσας

It may be helpful to state that Jesus spit on his fingers. Alternate translation: “after spitting on his fingers” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 7:34

ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν

This means that he looked up toward the sky, which is associated with the place where God lives.

ἐφφαθά

Here the author refers to something by an Aramaic word. This word should be copied as is into your language using your alphabet. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

ἐστέναξεν

This means that he groaned or that he let out a long deep breath that could be heard. It probably shows Jesus’ sympathy for the man.

λέγει αὐτῷ

“said to the man”

Mark 7:35

ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί

This means he was able to hear. Alternate translation: “his ears were opened and he was able to hear” or “he was able to hear” (See: Idiom)

ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus took away what prevented his tongue from speaking” or “Jesus loosened his tongue” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 7:36

ὅσον…αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ

The refers to him ordering them not to tell anyone about what he had done. Alternate translation: “the more he ordered them not to tell anyone” (See: Ellipsis)

μᾶλλον περισσότερον

“the more widely” or “the more”

Mark 7:37

ὑπέρπερισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο

“they were utterly amazed” or “they were exceedingly astonished” or “they were astonished beyond all measure”

τοὺς κωφοὺς…ἀλάλους

These refer to people. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: Metonymy)

Mark 8

Mark 8 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

Bread

When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.

Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to become larger before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: Metaphor)

“Adulterous generation”

When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: faithful, faithfulness, trustworthy and people of God)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Rhetorical Questions

Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples (Mark 8:17-21) and scolding the people (Mark 8:12). (See: Rhetorical Question)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” (Mark 8:35-37).

Mark 8:1

A great, hungry crowd is with Jesus. He feeds them using only seven loaves and a few fish before Jesus and his disciples get in a boat to go to another place.

ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις

This phrase is used to introduce a new event in the story. (See: Introduction of a New Event)

Mark 8:2

ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προσμένουσίν μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν τι φάγωσιν

“this is this third day these people have been with me, and they have nothing to eat”

Mark 8:3

ἐκλυθήσονται

This could be: (1) a literal statement that they may lose consciousness temporarily. (2) a hyperbolic exaggeration that means “they may become weak.” (See: Hyperbole)

Mark 8:4

πόθεν τούτους δυνήσεταί τις ὧδε χορτάσαι ἄρτων ἐπ’ ἐρημίας?

The disciples are expressing surprise that Jesus would expect them to be able to find enough food. Alternate translation: “This place is so deserted that there is no place here for us to get enough loaves of bread to satisfy these people!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἄρτων

Loaves of bread are lumps of dough that have been shaped and baked.

Mark 8:5

ἠρώτα αὐτούς

“Jesus asked his disciples”

Mark 8:6

παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς

This can be written as a direct quote. “Jesus commanded the crowd, ‘Sit down on the ground’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ἀναπεσεῖν

Use your language’s word for how people customarily eat when there is no table, whether sitting or lying down.

Mark 8:7

καὶ εἶχαν

Here the word they is used to refer to Jesus and his disciples.

εὐλογήσας αὐτὰ

“after Jesus gave thanks for the fish”

Mark 8:8

ἔφαγον

“the people ate”

ἦραν

Here, they could refer to the disciples, or to the people in the crowd.

περισσεύματα κλασμάτων ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας

This refers to the broken pieces of fish and bread that were left over after the people ate. Alternate translation: “the remaining broken pieces of bread and fish, which filled seven large baskets” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 8:9

καὶ ἀπέλυσεν αὐτούς

It may be helpful to clarify when he sent them away. Alternate translation: “and after they ate, Jesus sent them away” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 8:10

ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Δαλμανουθά

It may be helpful to clarify how they got to Dalmanutha. Alternate translation: “he sailed around the Sea of Galilee to the region of Dalmanutha” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Δαλμανουθά

This is the name of a place on the northwestern shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 8:11

In Dalmanutha, Jesus refuses to give the Pharisees a sign before he and his disciples get in a boat and leave.

ζητοῦντες παρ’ αὐτοῦ

“asking him for”

σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

They wanted a sign that would prove that Jesus’ power and authority were from God. The word heaven could be: (1) a metonym for God. Alternate translation: “a sign from God” (2) the sky. Alternate translation: “a sign from the sky” (See: Metonymy)

πειράζοντες αὐτόν

The Pharisees tried to test Jesus to make him prove that he was from God. Some information can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “to prove that God had sent him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 8:12

ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ

This means that he groaned or that he let out a long deep breath that could be heard. It probably shows Jesus’ deep sadness that the Pharisees refused to believe him. See how you translated this in Mark 7:34.

τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ

“in himself”

τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον?

Jesus is scolding them. This question may be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “This generation should not seek a sign.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ

When Jesus speaks of this generation, he is referring to the people who lived at that time. The Pharisees are included in this group. Alternate translation: “Why do you and the people of this generation seek for” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰ δοθήσεται…σημεῖον

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I will not give a sign” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 8:13

ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς, πάλιν ἐμβὰς

Jesus’ disciples went with him. Some information can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he left them and got into a boat again with his disciples” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς τὸ πέραν

You can state clearly that this describes the Sea of Galilee. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the sea” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 8:14

While Jesus and his disciples are in a boat, they have a discussion about the lack of understanding among the Pharisees and Herod, though they had seen many signs.

καὶ

Here, And marks a break in the main story line. Here the author tells background information about the disciples forgetting to bring bread. (See: Background Information)

εἰ μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον

The negative phrase except for is used to emphasize how small an amount of bread they had. Alternate translation: “only one loaf” (See: Litotes)

Mark 8:15

ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε

These two terms have a common meaning and are repeated here for emphasis. They can be combined. Alternate translation: “Keep watch” (See: Doublet)

τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρῴδου

Here Jesus is speaking to his disciples in a metaphor they do not understand. Jesus is comparing the Pharisees’ and Herod’s teachings to yeast, but you should not explain this when you translate it because the disciples themselves did not understand it. (See: Metaphor)

Mark 8:16

ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχουσιν

In this statement, it may be helpful to state what they thought Jesus had meant when he spoke to them about bread. Alternate translation: “that he must have said that because they had no bread” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχουσιν

The word no is an exaggeration. The disciples did have one loaf of bread (Mark 8:14), but that was not much different from having no bread at all. Alternate translation: “very little bread” (See: Hyperbole)

Mark 8:17

τί διαλογίζεσθε ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε?

Here Jesus is mildly rebuking his disciples because they should have understood what he had been talking about. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not be thinking that I am talking about actual bread.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε?

These questions have the same meaning and are used together to emphasize that they do not understand. This can be written as one question. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet understand?” (See: Parallelism)

οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε?

This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should perceive and understand by now the things I say and do.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?

Here, hearts is a metonym for a person’s mind. (See: Metonymy)

πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?

The phrase hearts become hardened is a metaphor for not being able or willing to understand something. (See: Metaphor)

πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν?

Jesus uses a question to scold the disciples. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Your thinking has become so dull!” or “You are so slow to understand what I mean!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 8:18

ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε? καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε?

Jesus continues to mildly rebuke his disciples. These questions can be written as statements. Alternate translation: “You have eyes, but you do not understand what you see. You have ears, but you do not understand what you hear. You should remember.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 8:19

τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους

This refers to the 5,000 people Jesus fed. Alternate translation: “the 5,000 people” (See: Metonymy)

τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους

“the five thousand people” (See: Numbers)

πόσους κοφίνους κλασμάτων πλήρεις ἤρατε

It may be helpful to state when they collected the baskets of pieces. Alternate translation: “how many baskets full of broken pieces of bread did you collect after everyone finished eating” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 8:20

τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους

This refers to the 4,000 people Jesus fed. Alternate translation: “the 4,000 people” (See: Metonymy)

τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους

“the four thousand people” (See: Numbers)

πόσων σπυρίδων πληρώματα κλασμάτων ἤρατε

It may be helpful to state when they collected these. Alternate translation: “how many baskets full of broken pieces of bread did you collect after everyone finished eating” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 8:21

πῶς οὔπω συνίετε?

Jesus is mildly rebuking his disciples for not understanding. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should understand by now the things I say and do.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 8:22

When Jesus and his disciples get out of their boat at Bethsaida, Jesus heals a blind man.

Βηθσαϊδάν

This is a town on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated the name of this town in Mark 6:45. (See: How to Translate Names)

ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψηται

It may be helpful to state why they wanted Jesus to touch the man. Alternate translation: “to touch him in order to heal him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 8:23

πτύσας εἰς τὰ ὄμματα αὐτοῦ, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ, ἐπηρώτα αὐτόν

“when Jesus had spit on the man’s eyes and laid his hands on him, Jesus asked the man”

Mark 8:24

ἀναβλέψας

“when the man looked up”

βλέπω τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περιπατοῦντας

The man sees men walking around, yet they are not clear to him, so he compares them to trees. Alternate translation: “Yes, I see people! They are walking around, but I cannot see them clearly. They look like trees” (See: Simile)

Mark 8:25

εἶτα πάλιν ἐπέθηκεν

“Then Jesus again laid”

καὶ διέβλεψεν καὶ ἀπεκατέστη

The phrase was restored can be written in active form. Alternate translation: “restoring the man’s sight, and then the man opened his eyes” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 8:27

Jesus and his disciples talk on their way to the villages of Caesarea Philippi about who Jesus is and what will happen to him.

Mark 8:28

οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ λέγοντες

“But they answered him, saying,”

Ἰωάννην τὸν Βαπτιστήν

The disciples answer that this was who some people said Jesus was. This can be shown more clearly. Alternate translation: “Some people say that you are John the Baptist” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἄλλοι…ἄλλοι

The tow occurrences of others refers to other people. This refers to their responses to Jesus’ question. Alternate translation: “other people say you are … other people say you are” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 8:29

αὐτὸς ἐπηρώτα αὐτούς

“Jesus asked his disciples”

Mark 8:30

ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ

Jesus did not want them to tell anyone that he was the Christ. This can be made more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus warned them not to tell anyone that he is the Christ” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ

This can be written as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “Jesus warned them, ‘Do not tell anyone that I am the Christ’” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

Mark 8:31

τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

This is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the elders and the chief priests and the scribes would reject him, and that men would kill him, and that after three days he would rise up” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 8:32

παρρησίᾳ τὸν λόγον ἐλάλει

“he said this in a way that was easy to understand”

ἤρξατο ἐπιτιμᾶν αὐτῷ

Peter rebuked Jesus for saying the things he said would happen to the Son of Man. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “began to rebuke him for saying these things” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 8:33

After rebuking Peter for his not wanting Jesus to die and rise, Jesus tells both his disciples and the crowd how to follow him.

ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ, ὅτι οὐ φρονεῖς

Jesus means that Peter is acting like Satan because Peter is trying to prevent Jesus from accomplishing what God sent him to do. Alternate translation: “Get behind me, because you are acting like Satan! You are not setting” (See: Metaphor)

ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου

“Get away from me”

Mark 8:34

ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν

To follow Jesus here represents being one of his disciples. Alternate translation: “be my disciple” or “be one of my disciples” (See: Metaphor)

ἀπαρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν

“he must not give in to his own desires” or “he must forsake his own desires”

ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι

The cross represents suffering and death. (See: Metonymy)

ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι

“carry his cross and follow me.” Taking up the cross represents being willing to suffer and die. Alternate translation: “must obey me even to the point of suffering and dying” (See: Metaphor)

ἀκολουθείτω μοι

To follow Jesus here represents obeying him. Alternate translation: “obey me” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 8:35

ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ

“For anyone who wants”

τὴν ψυχὴν

This refers to both physical life and spiritual life.

ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

“because of me and because of the gospel.” Jesus is talking about people who lose their lives because they follow Jesus and the gospel. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “because he follows me and tells others the gospel” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 8:36

τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ?

This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Even if a person gains the whole world, it will not benefit him if he forfeits his life.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ

This can also be expressed as a condition starting with the word “if.” Alternate translation: “if he gains the whole world and then forfeits his life”

κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον

The words the whole world are an exaggeration for great riches. Alternate translation: “to gain everything he ever wanted” (See: Hyperbole)

ζημιωθῆναι

To forfeit something is to lose it or to have another person take it away.

Mark 8:37

τί γὰρ δοῖ ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ?

This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life.” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί…δοῖ ἄνθρωπος

If in your language to give requires someone to receive what is given, you can state clearly that “God” is the receiver. Alternate translation: “what can a person give to God”

Mark 8:38

ἐπαισχυνθῇ με καὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους

“may be ashamed of me and my message”

ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, τῇ μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ

Jesus speaks of this generation as adulterous, meaning that they are unfaithful in their relationship with God. Alternate translation: “in this generation of people who have committed adultery against God and are very sinful” or “in this generation of people who are unfaithful to God and are very sinful” (See: Metaphor)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

This is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ὅταν ἔλθῃ

“when he comes back”

ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ

When Jesus returns he will have the same glory as his Father.

μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν ἁγίων

“accompanied by the holy angels”

Mark 9

Mark 9 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

“transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: glory, glorious, glorify and fear, afraid, frighten)

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Hyperbole

Jesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, “If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off” (Mark 9:43), he was exaggerating so that his hearers would pay close attention to what he was saying and realize how important it is to avoid sin.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Elijah and Moses

Elijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.

“Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter (Mark 9:31). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: Son of Man, son of man and First, Second or Third Person)

Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all” (Mark 9:35).

Mark 9:1

ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς

Here, the pronoun he refers to Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you can state who he refers to in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying to them” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

Here, the word you is plural, in the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, and refers to everyone that Jesus is speaking to. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “Truly I say to all of you” (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου

The phrase taste death is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If your readers would not understand this idiom you can use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die” (See: Idiom)

οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun death by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of power, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun power by using an adverb such as “powerfully.” Alternate translation: “before they would see the kingdom of God come powerfully” (See: Abstract Nouns)

τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει

The phrase the kingdom of God come with power represents God showing himself as king. If it would help your readers understand the meaning you can state this plainly. The phrase the kingdom of God come with power probably refers to God powerfully confirming that Jesus is the Messianic king through the transfiguration of Jesus which immediately follows this verse in 9:2-10. Alternate translation: “God powerfully showing himself as king” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 9:2

κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους

The author uses the reflexive pronoun themselves here to emphasize that they were alone and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain. (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν

The word transfigured means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning of this word in plain language. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ appearance was changed in front of them” or “when they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been” (See: Translate Unknowns)

μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning of the phrase he was transfigured before them with an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God changed Jesus’ appearance before them” or “God transfigured Jesus before them” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 9:3

οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι

The word launderer refers to a person who worked with cloth and would clean and bleach it. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “whiter than any person who bleached cloth could make them” or “such as no person on earth who bleached cloth could make them” (See: Translate Unknowns)

Mark 9:4

Ἠλείας

Elijah is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in Mark 6:15. (See: How to Translate Names)

Μωϋσεῖ

Moses is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in Mark 1:44. (See: How to Translate Names)

αὐτοῖς

Here, the word them refers to Peter, James, and John. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἦσαν συνλαλοῦντες

Here, the word they refers to Elijah and Moses. Alternate translation: “Elijah and Moses were talking with” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

καὶ ὤφθη αὐτοῖς Ἠλείας σὺν Μωϋσεῖ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the passive phrase were seen with an active form. Alternate translation: “And they saw Elijah and Moses” (See: Active or Passive)

αὐτοῖς

The word them refers to Peter, James, and John. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Mark 9:5

ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ

Here, the word answering is used to introduce Peter into the conversation. Peter was not answering a question.

καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι

Here, the pronoun us could: (1) refer only to Peter, James, and John, in which case us would be exclusive. (2) include Jesus, in which case us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

σκηνάς

Shelters are simple, temporary places in which to sit or sleep. (See: Translate Unknowns)

Μωϋσεῖ

Moses is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in Mark 1:44. (See: How to Translate Names)

Ἠλείᾳ

Elijah is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in Mark 6:15. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 9:6

οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο

This entire verse is a parenthetical statement which gives background information about Peter, James, and John. (See: Background Information)

ἔκφοβοι…ἐγένοντο

Alternate translation: “they were very frightened” or “they were very afraid”

Mark 9:7

ἐγένετο…ἐπισκιάζουσα αὐτοῖς

Alternate translation: “appeared and covered them”

ἐγένετο φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης

Mark speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from the cloud to earth. Alternate translation: “God spoke from the cloud and said” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-personification/01.md)

ὁ Υἱός μου

Son is an important title for Jesus. The title Son describes Jesus’ relationship with God the Father. (See: Translating Son and Father)

ἀκούετε

Listen is a command or instruction to Peter, James, and John. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

Mark 9:8

οὐκέτι…εἶδον

Here, they refers to Peter, James, and John. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Mark 9:9

αὐτῶν

The first occurrence of the word they in this verse refers to Jesus and Peter and James and John. Alternate translation: “Jesus, Peter, James and John” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς

Here, the pronoun he refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered them” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται

Here, the pronoun them and the second and third occurrence of the pronoun they all refer to Peter and James and John. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered Peter and James and John not to tell anyone about what they had just seen” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται

Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered them not tell anyone about what they had just seen”

ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ

Jesus speaks figuratively in this way of coming back to life, since it involves rising out of the grave. Alternate translation: “would come back to life” (See: Metonymy)

Mark 9:10

καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς

And they kept the matter to themselves means that Peter, James, and John did not share with other people that Jesus had been transfigured until after he rose from the dead. Alternate translation: “And they did not tell others about Jesus’ transfiguration” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι

See how you translated the phrase “rise from the dead” in the previous verse.

Mark 9:11

ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες

Here, the pronoun they refers to Peter, James, and John. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John were questioning Jesus, saying” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν

Here, the pronoun him refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “they were questioning Jesus” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Ἠλείαν

Elijah is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in Mark 6:15. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 9:12

ἔφη

Here, the pronoun he refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ?

Jesus uses a rhetorical question here to remind his disciples that the Scriptures also teach that the Son of Man must suffer and be despised. You could translate this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “But I also want you to consider what is written about the Son of Man. The Scriptures say that he must suffer many things and be hated” (See: Rhetorical Question)

καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ

If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning behind the phrase been written with an active form. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Active or Passive)

ἐξουδενηθῇ

If it would be more natural in your language, you can state the phrase would be despised in active form. Alternate translation: “that people would hate him” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 9:13

ἐποίησαν αὐτῷ ὅσα ἤθελον

If it would help your readers, consider stating explicitly what the Jewish people did to Elijah. Alternate translation: “our leaders treated him very badly, just as they wanted to” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 9:14

ἐλθόντες πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς

Alternate translation: “When Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the other disciples who had not gone with them up the mountain”

αὐτοὺς…αὐτούς

Here, both occurrences of the pronoun them refers to the other disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain with Jesus and Peter, James, and John. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Mark 9:15

αὐτὸν…προστρέχοντες…αὐτόν

All three of the occurrences of the pronoun him in this verse, refer to Jesus. If it would help your readers you can clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Mark 9:16

καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτούς

Here, the first occurrence of the pronoun them could refer to: (1) the disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked his disciples” (2) the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the people in the crown” (3) the scribes. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the scribes” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Mark 9:18

ξηραίνεται

Alternate translation: “his body becomes rigid”

οὐκ ἴσχυσαν

The phrase the were not strong enough refers to the disciples not being about to drive the spirit out of the boy. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they could not drive it out of him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 9:19

ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς λέγει

Here, the pronoun them is plural so Jesus is addressing more than one person. However, it is not clear exactly who them refers to. It could refer to the disciples, the crowd, the boy and his father, some some combination of them, or to all of them at once. Here,them probably refers to everyone who was present. Use the form in your language that would be used for addressing a group of people. Alternate translation: “But answering all of them, Jesus said” or “Addressing them all, Jesus said” or “Addressing everyone present, Jesus said” (See: When to Keep Information Implicit)

ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a generation, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun generation in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος

Jesus uses the term generation figuratively to mean all the people who were alive at that time in history and specifically to refer to all the people who were present with him. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-metonymy/01.md)

ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος! ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν

Here, Jesus uses two rhetorical questions, until when will I be with you and Until when will I bear with you, to show his frustration and disappointment with unbelief. If you do not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or as an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You unbelieving generation. You test my patience” or “You unbelieving generation. Your unbelief tires me! I wonder how long I must bear with you” or “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe, so I hope I do not have to stay here and put up with you for very long” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν?

The question until when will I be with you and the question Until when will I bear with you have very similar meanings. Jesus uses these two similar questions together in order to emphasize his frustration and disappointment. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “how long will I have to be with you and endure your unbelief” (See: Parallelism)

ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν

Alternate translation: “Until when should I endure you” or “Until when must I put up with you” or “How long must I endure you”

φέρετε αὐτὸν πρός με

In the original language that Mark wrote this Gospel in, the word bring is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people.

Mark 9:20

πνεῦμα

See how you translated the word spirit in Mark 9:17.

καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν

In this verse the first and fourth occurrence of the pronoun him refer to the man’s “son” who was possessed by a mute spirit and mentioned in Mark 9:17. If it would help your readers, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen him, the spirit immediately threw the boy into a convulsion” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν

In this verse, the second and third occurrence of the pronoun him refer Jesus. If it would help your readers, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen Jesus, the spirit immediately threw the boy into a convulsion” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Mark 9:21

καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ, πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ? ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ἐκ παιδιόθεν

Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the boy’s father, ‘How long of a time has this been happening to him?’ And the father said, ‘This has been happening to him since childhood’”

Mark 9:22

βοήθησον ἡμῖν, σπλαγχνισθεὶς ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς

In the sentence help us, having had compassion on us, Mark records the father using a figure of speech in which the logical flow of events is altered in order to put what is most important in the mind of the speaker first. The normal way of saying this would be, “having had compassion on us, help us”, because it shows the natural order of events, since having had compassion on someone normally precedes helping them. Mark records the father saying help us first because receiving help was what was most important to the father. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “have compassion on us and help us” (See: Information Structure)

σπλαγχνισθεὶς

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of compassion, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun compassion in another way, such as by using the verb “pity.” Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Mark 9:23

εἰ δύνῃ?

The phrase If you are able is Jesus repeating back to the man what the man had just said to Jesus. Jesus does this in order to rebuke the man’s doubt. If it would be more natural in your language you can express this as a statement or in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You should not say to me, ‘If you are able’” or “You ask me if I am able. Of course I am able” or “Why do you say ‘If you are able’”

πάντα δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι

Alternate translation: “Everything is possible for the person who believes” or “Anything is possible for the person believing in God”

τῷ πιστεύοντι

The word believing refers to belief in God, and here it specifically refers to belief in Jesus and his power. The phrase the one means “any person” or “any one.” If it would help your readers you can say these things explicitly. Alternate translation: “for anyone who believes that God is able to do them” or “for any person who believes in God’s power” or “for anyone one who believes in me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 9:24

βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ

The sentence Help my unbelief does not mean that the man had no belief in Jesus or his power but rather these words express that the man realized he did not believe fully or believe to the extent that he should. The man is asking Jesus to help him overcome his unbelief and increase his faith. If it would help your readers you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Help me to have more faith” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of unbelief, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun unbelief in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Mark 9:25

ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος

This means that more people were running toward where Jesus was and that the crowd there was growing larger. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many people were gathering around them” or “people were gathering quickly around them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος

The word crowd is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people was running to them” or “many people were running to them” (See: Collective Nouns)

τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ κωφὸν πνεῦμα

The words mute and deaf can be explained if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “You unclean spirit, who are causing this boy to be unable to speak and unable to hear” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ

Your language may say “go out” rather than come out in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “go out from him” (See: Go and Come)

Mark 9:26

κράξας

Alternate translation: “after the unclean spirit cried out”

ἐξῆλθεν

Your language may say “went out” rather than came out in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “it went out” or “the spirit went out of the boy” (See: Go and Come)

ἐγένετο ὡσεὶ νεκρὸς

Mark is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the boy appeared dead” or “the boy looked like a dead person” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ὥστε τοὺς πολλοὺς λέγειν

Alternate translation: “so that many people said”

Mark 9:27

ἤγειρεν αὐτόν

Alternate translation: “helped him get up”

Mark 9:28

εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς οἶκον

Your language may say “come” rather than “went” in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “when he had come into a house” (See: Go and Come)

εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς οἶκον

Alternate translation: “when he had entered into a house”

κατ’ ἰδίαν

Alternate translation: “privately”

Mark 9:29

τοῦτο τὸ γένος ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν, εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ

The words nothing and except are both negative words. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “This kind can be cast out only by prayer and fasting” (See: Double Negatives)

τοῦτο τὸ γένος

Here, the phrase This kind refers to kinds of unclean spirits. If it would help your readers you can say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This kind of unclean spirit” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦτο τὸ γένος…δύναται ἐξελθεῖν

Your language may say “go out” rather than “come out” in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “This kind is able to go out” (See: Go and Come)

προσευχῇ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of prayer, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun prayer in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

νηστείᾳ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fasting, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun fasting in another way. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Mark 9:31

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται

If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase is being delivered with an active form and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Evil men will deliver the Son of Man” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται

Alternate translation: “The Son of Man is being betrayed”

εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων

Here, hands is a metonym for control. Alternate translation: “into the control of men” or “into the custody of men” (See: Metonymy)

ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται

If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase having been killed with an active form and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “after they kill him, he will rise again after three days” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 9:33

ἦλθον εἰς Καφαρναούμ

Your language may say “they went” rather than they came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to Capernaum” (See: Go and Come)

ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ γενόμενος

Your language may say “went” rather than came in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having went into the house” (See: Go and Come)

Mark 9:34

τίς μείζων

Here, greatest refers to who was the greatest among the disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who was the greatest among them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 9:35

εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος

Here the words first and last are opposites of one another. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being first and of being the “least important” as being last. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants God to consider him to be the most important person of all, he must consider himself to be the least important of all” (See: Metaphor)

πρῶτος

If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as first, you can express the meaning behind the word first in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: see the UST. (See: Ordinal Numbers)

πάντων…πάντων

Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people”

Mark 9:36

ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν

The pronoun them refers to the 12 disciples. If it would help your readers you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples” (See: Pronouns — When to Use Them)

Mark 9:37

ἓν τῶν τοιούτων παιδίων

Alternate translation: “a child such as this one”

ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου

Here, name is a figurative way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. Alternate translation: “on my behalf” (See: Metonymy)

οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με

does not receive me but the one who sent me means that the people who receive Jesus are not just receiving him but are also receiving God who sent him. If it would help your readers you can state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “receives not just me, but also receives God who has sent me” or “receives not only me, but receives God who sent me to represent him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με

Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that the one refers to God. If it would help your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who has sent me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 9:38

ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου

Here, name is a figurative way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. This expression means the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” or “by your authority” (See: Metonymy)

οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν

Here, following does not seem to mean to be one of Jesus’ disciples, since this man was acting in Jesus’ name. Here, following us means that this man did not travel in the group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “he does not travel with you in our group” or “he is not part of our group” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 9:39

μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν

Jesus is figuratively expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. You can state this positively. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue” (See: Litotes)

ὀνόματί

See how you translated name in the previous verse 9:39. (See: Metonymy)

κακολογῆσαί

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evil, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun evil by using an adjective to describe it or by expressing it some other way that is natural in language. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Mark 9:40

οὐκ ἔστιν καθ’ ἡμῶν

Alternate translation: “is not opposing us”

Mark 9:41

ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ποτήριον ὕδατος ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε

Jesus speaks about giving someone a cup of water as an example of how one person may help another. This is a figurative way of referring to any possible way that a person might help someone else. Here, giving one of the disciples a cup of water in Jesus’ name refers to helping them because they represent Jesus and are doing his work. If your readers would not understand this you can use a similar expression from your language or say this using plain language. Alternate translation: “gives you a cup of water because you are working for me” or “helps you on my account” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὀνόματι

See how you translated name in 9:37. (See: Metonymy)

ἐν ὀνόματι

Here, the phrase in the name leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “in my name” or “in the name of me” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε

in the name because is an idiom which means to do something for the sake of someone. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “because you belong to Christ” or “because you serve me” (See: Idiom)

οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ

Here, Jesus uses the negative phrase certainly not together with the negative word loseto express a strong positive meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he will certainly receive” (See: Litotes)

οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of reward, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun reward by using a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “he will certainly be rewarded” or “God will certainly reward that person” (See: Abstract Nouns)

οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ

Although the pronouns he and his are masculine, they are being used here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that person will certainly not lose their reward” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Mark 9:42

ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων

The phrase these little ones could be: (1) a reference to children who love Jesus and who are physically little compared to adults. Alternate translation: “one of these children who believe in me” (2) a figurative reference to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “one of these new believers” or (3) a figurative reference to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “one of these common people” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-metaphor/01.md)

καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον εἰ

Jesus is drawing a comparison to the punishment for causing people to sin. He means that this person’s punishment for causing people to sin will be worse than if he had drowned in the sea. No one would actually put a stone around his neck and throw him into the sea as an alternative to that punishment, and Jesus is not saying that anyone will do so. Alternate translation: “The punishment he will receive will be worse than if” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-explicit/01.md)

μύλος ὀνικὸς

large millstones* were round stones used for grinding grain into flour. They were so heavy that they required a donkey or an ox to turn them. If your readers would not be familiar with this, you could use the name of an object in your area that is very heavy, or you could use a general expression such as “a very heavy stone”. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Translate Unknowns)

περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ

The implication is that someone would tie the stone around the person’s neck. Alternate translation: “if someone were to attach a millstone around his neck” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-explicit/01.md)

Mark 9:43

ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου

Here, hand is a metonym for doing, or desiring to do something sinful with your hand. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful with one of your hands” or “if you are doing something sinful with one of your hands” (See: Metonymy)

ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν

When Jesus says, if your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off, he is using hyperbole in order to emphasize the seriousness of sin and the importance of avoiding it. Jesus is not being literal when he says to cut off your hand because Judaism taught against harming one’s body and Jesus taught in Mark 7:14-23, and elsewhere, that the human heart is what causes people to sin. If it would be helpful to your readers you can clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Hyperbole)

κυλλὸν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν

When Jesus speaks of entering into eternal life maimed he is not being literal, but rather is using hyperbole in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful to your readers you can clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. (See: Hyperbole)

εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν

Here, the phrase enter into life is referring to living eternally with God after one’s life on earth has ended. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to enter into eternal life” or “to die and live forever” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-explicit/01.md)

εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun life in another way. Alternate translation: “live with God forever” (See: Abstract Nouns)

εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἄσβεστον

Alternate translation: “where the fire cannot be put out”

Mark 9:45

ἐὰν ὁ πούς σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε

Here, the word foot is a metonym for going, or desiring to go someplace for the purpose of sinning. Alternate translation: “if you use your foot to walk someplace in order to sin” (See: Metonymy)

εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν

See how you translated the phrase enter into life in Mark 9:43. (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-explicit/01.md)

εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν χωλὸν

When Jesus speaks of entering into eternal life lame he is not being literal, but rather is using hyperbole in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful to your readers you can clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes in your translation. (See: Hyperbole)

βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν

If your language does not use the active form in this way, you could express the phrase to be thrown in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you into Gehenna” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 9:47

ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν

Here, eye is a metonym for desiring to sin as a result of looking at something which God has prohibited. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this in plain language. Alternate translation: “if you want to sin because of looking at something, tear your eye out” or “if you want to do something sinful because of what you look at, tear your eye out” (See: Metonymy)

μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here, the phrase enter into the kingdom of God is referring to living eternally with God after one’s life on earth has ended and has a similar meaning to the phrase “to enter into life” that was used in Mark 9:43 and Mark 9:45. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to enter into God’s kingdom and live with him forever with only one eye” (See: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_ta/src/branch/master/translate/figs-explicit/01.md)

μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

When Jesus speaks of entering into the kingdom of God with one eye he is not being literal, but rather is using hyperbole in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful to your readers you can clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. (See: Hyperbole)

βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν

See how you translated the phrase to be thrown into Gehenna in Mark 9:45. (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 9:49

πᾶς…πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται

If your language does not use the active form in this way, you could express the phrase will be salted in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will salt everyone with fire” (See: Active or Passive)

πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται

Here, fire is a metaphor for suffering, and putting salt on people is a metaphor for purifying them. So will be salted with fire is a metaphor for being purified through suffering. Alternate translation: “will be made pure in the fire of suffering” or “will suffer in order to be purified as a sacrifice is purified with salt” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 9:50

ἄναλον γένηται

“loses its salty taste”

ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε?

with what will you season it is a rhetorical question. can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “you cannot make it salty again.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε

“will you make it taste salty again”

ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα

Jesus speaks of doing good things for one another as if good things were salt that people possess. Alternate translation: “Do good to each other, like salt adds flavor to food” (See: Metaphor)

ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα

The plural reflexive pronoun yourselves is used here to emphasize that Jesus wanted each of his 12 disciples to apply what he was saying to themselves personally. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “make sure that each of you has salt within yourself” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἀλλήλοις

be at peace with one another is a command or instruction to all of Jesus’ 12 disciples. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: Forms of ‘You’ — Singular)

Mark 10

Mark 10 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 10:7-8.

Special concepts in this chapter

Jesus’ teaching about divorce

The Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage to show that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce.

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Metaphor

Metaphors are mental pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of “the cup which I will drink,” he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant” (Mark 10:43).

Mark 10:1

ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς, ἔρχεται

Jesus’ disciples were traveling with him. They were leaving Capernaum. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “getting up, Jesus and his disciples left Capernaum and went from that place” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἔρχεται

Your language may say “comes” rather than goes in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he comes” (See: Go and Come)

καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου

Alternate translation: “and to the land on the other side of the Jordan River” or “and to the area east of the Jordan River”

συνπορεύονται…ὄχλοι πρὸς αὐτόν

Your language may say “went” rather than come in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “the crowds went together to him” (See: Go and Come)

εἰώθει

Alternate translation: “was his custom” or “he usually did”

Mark 10:5

τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s inner being or mind. (See: Metonymy)

τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν

The phrase hardness of heart is an idiom which describes stubbornly choosing to resist God’s will and instead choosing one’s own will. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase “the hardness of their heart” in Mark 3:5. Alternate translation: “your stubbornness” (See: Idiom)

Mark 10:6

ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς

Here, the adjectives male and female are being used as nouns in order to describe two groups of people, males and females. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this in another way. Alternate translation: “God made people male and female” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἀπὸ δὲ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς

Beginning in the previous verse Jesus begins directly addressing the Pharisees with the words “Because of your hardness of heart” and this verse and the next two verses continue his direct speech to the Pharisees. However, in this verse, beginning with the phrase He made them male and female* Jesus begins quoting two Old Testament scripture passages, Genesis 1:27 and Genesis 2:24 which he concludes at the end of Mark 10:9. Jesus entire address is enclosed with double quotation marks and his quotation of the Old Testament is enclosed with single quotation marks because it is a quote within a quote. If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate Jesus’ direct quotation of the Old Testament as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But from the beginning of creation the Scriptures tell us that God made people male and female” (See: Quotes within Quotes)

Mark 10:7

καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα

Here, the word man is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “men will leave their fathers and mothers” or “men will leave their parents” (See: Collective Nouns)

καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα

The phrase a man will leave his father and mother does not mean that a man necessarily has to stop living in his father’s and mother’s home once he gets married. Rather it means (COME BACK) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 10:8

καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν; ὥστε οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ

In this verse Jesus finishes his quotation of Genesis 1:27 and Genesis 2:24. Jesus began quoting Genesis in the second half of Mark 10:6.

οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ

A husband and wife no longer being two but instead being one flesh is metaphor to illustrate a husband and wife’s close union as a couple. If your readers would not understand what this means you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or clarify this using plain language. Alternate translation: “the two people are like one person” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 10:9

ὃ οὖν ὁ Θεὸς συνέζευξεν, ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω

The phrase what God joined together refers to any married couple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Therefore since God has joined together husband and wife, let no one tear them apart” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω

Here, although the term man is masculine, it is used in a generic sense to refer to any person, male or female. If it would help your readers you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “should not be separated by any person” or “let people not separate” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

Mark 10:10

περὶ τούτου ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν

The word this refers to the conversation that Jesus had just had with the Pharisees about divorce. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “asked Jesus about the conversation he had just had with the Pharisees” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 10:11

ὃς ἂν

Alternate translation: “Anyone who”

Mark 10:12

μοιχᾶται

Here, the phrase she commits adultery means that a woman who divorces her husband and marries another man commits adultery against her previous husband. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “she commits adultery against the first man she married” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 10:13

καὶ

Here, the word And introduces a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And it happened that” or “After this” (See: Introduction of a New Event)

προσέφερον

Here, they refers to people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αὐτῶν ἅψηται

Here, he might touch them means that Jesus would lay his hands on the children and bless them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might touch them with his hands and bless them” or “Jesus might lay his hands on them and bless them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 10:14

ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά

The phrase Permit the little children to come to me and the phrase do not prevent them mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Be sure to allow the little children to come to me” (See: Doublet)

μὴ κωλύετε

If the double negative do not prevent would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “allow” (See: Double Negatives)

Mark 10:15

ὃς ἂν μὴ δέξηται τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὡς παιδίον, οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν

Alternate translation: “if anyone will not receive the kingdom of God as a little child, that person will definitely not enter it”

ὡς παιδίον

The point of the comparison as a little child is that Jesus is comparing how people must receive the kingdom of God to how little children would receive things. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with humble faith” (See: Simile)

οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν

Here, the word it refers to the kingdom of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not enter the kingdom of God” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 10:16

ἐναγκαλισάμενος αὐτὰ

Alternate translation: “embracing the children in his arms”

Mark 10:17

ἵνα ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω

Here, the word inherit means “be given” or “receive” and is being used metaphorically to mean “receive eternal life” or “be given eternal.” If your readers would not understand what it means to “inherit eternal life” in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in order to receive eternal life” or “in order to obtain eternal life” (See: Metaphor)

ζωὴν

If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the idea behind life by using a verbal form like “live.” Alternate translation: See the UST. (See: Abstract Nouns)

Mark 10:18

τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν?

Jesus’ question “Why are you calling me good” is a rhetorical question which Jesus is asks in order to make a point. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good” (See: Rhetorical Question)

τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός

By saying, Why are you calling me good? No one {is} good except God alone, Jesus is asking the man a rhetorical question in order to make a point. The Bible clearly teaches that Jesus is God and Jesus affirms elsewhere that he believes that he is God. Make sure that your translation does not portray Jesus as denying his own moral perfection or divinity here.

τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός

By saying, Why are you calling me good? No one {is} good except God alone, Jesus is correcting the man’s misunderstanding regarding eternal life and what it takes to please God. In the previous verse, the man called Jesus “Good Teacher” thinking that Jesus was a good man but not knowing that Jesus was God. In this verse, Jesus redirects the man’s focus away from people and towards God. As evidenced by the man’s question to Jesus in the previous verse, the man thinks that in order to merit God’s approval and “inherit eternal life” a person simply needs to know the right things to do and do them. Jesus’ words in this verse are meant to correct the man’s thinking and show the man that only God is fully good and that to please God a person must focus on God and put their trust in God’s charachter.

Mark 10:19

μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς

Alternate translation: “do not testify falsely against anyone” or “do not lie about someone in court”

Mark 10:21

ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ

“There is one thing you are missing.” Here, lacking is a metaphor for needing to do something. Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done” or (See: Metaphor)

δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς

Here the word it refers to the things he sells and is a metonym for the money he receives when he sells them. Alternate translation: “give the money to the poor” (See: Metonymy)

τοῖς πτωχοῖς

This refers to poor people. Alternate translation: “to poor people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

θησαυρὸν

wealth, valuable things

Mark 10:22

ἔχων κτήματα πολλά

“someone who owned many things”

Mark 10:23

πῶς δυσκόλως

“It is very difficult”

Mark 10:24

ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς

“but Jesus said to his disciples again”

τέκνα, πῶς

“My children, how.” Jesus is teaching them as a father would teach his children. Alternate translation: “My friends, how” (See: Metaphor)

πῶς δύσκολόν ἐστιν

“it is very hard”

Mark 10:25

εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν

Jesus uses an exaggeration to emphasize how very difficult it is for rich people to get into the kingdom of God. (See: Hyperbole)

εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον

This speaks of an impossible situation. If you cannot state this in this way in your language, it can be written as a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “It would be easier for a camel” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος

“the hole of a needle.” This refers to the small hole in the end of a sewing needle that thread passes through.

Mark 10:26

οἱ δὲ περισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο

“But the disciples were very astonished”

καὶ τίς δύναται σωθῆναι?

This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “If that is so, then no one will be saved!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 10:27

παρὰ ἀνθρώποις ἀδύνατον, ἀλλ’ οὐ παρὰ Θεῷ

The understood information may be supplied. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for people to save themselves, but God can save them” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 10:28

ἰδοὺ

Behold is used here to draw attention to the words that come next.

ἀφήκαμεν πάντα

“have left everything behind”

Mark 10:29

οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς ἀφῆκεν

The phrase there is no one who has left is a litotes. Jesus uses it to emphasize that every single person who leaves things for Jesus’ sake will receive the rewards that he lists in the next verse. (See: Litotes)

ἢ ἀγροὺς

“or plots of ground” or “or the land that he owns”

ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ

“for my cause” or “for me”

τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

“to proclaim the gospel”

Mark 10:30

ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ

Jesus finishes a sentence that begins with the words there is no one who has left (verse 29). You can state the whole sentence positively. “everyone who has left house, or brothers, or sisters, or mother, or father, or children, or lands, for my sake, and for the gospel, will receive” (See: Double Negatives)

ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ

“in this life” or “in this present age”

ἀδελφοὺς, καὶ ἀδελφὰς, καὶ μητέρας, καὶ τέκνα

Like the list in verse 29, this describes the family in general. The word “fathers” is missing in verse 30, but it does not significantly change the meaning.

μετὰ διωγμῶν, καὶ ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ, ζωὴν αἰώνιον

This can be reworded so that the ideas in the abstract noun persecutions are expressed with the verb “persecute.” Because the sentence is so long and complicated, “will receive” can be repeated. Alternate translation: “and even though people persecute them, in the world to come, they will receive everlasting life” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ

“in the future world” or “in the future”

Mark 10:31

ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι

Here the words first and last are opposites of one another. Jesus speaks of being the “important” as being “first” and of being the “unimportant” as being “last.” Alternate translation: “are important will be unimportant, and those who are unimportant will be important” (See: Metaphor)

ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι

The phrase the last refers to people who are “last.” Also, the understood verb in this clause may be supplied. Alternate translation: “those who are last, first” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι

The understood verb in this clause may be supplied. Alternate translation: “those who are last will be first” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 10:32

ἦσαν δὲ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ἀναβαίνοντες εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, καὶ ἦν προάγων αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς

“And Jesus and his disciples were walking on the road, on the way up to Jerusalem, and Jesus was in front of his disciples”

οἱ…ἀκολουθοῦντες

“those who were following behind them.” Some people were walking behind Jesus and his disciples.

Mark 10:33

ἰδοὺ

“Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται

Jesus is speaking about himself. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone will deliver the Son of Man” or “they will hand the Son of Man over” (See: Active or Passive)

κατακρινοῦσιν

The word they refers to the chief priests and the scribes.

παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

“put him under the control of the Gentiles”

Mark 10:34

ἐμπαίξουσιν

“people will mock”

ἀναστήσεται

This refers to rising from the dead. Alternate translation: “he will rise from being dead” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 10:35

θέλομεν…αἰτήσωμέν…ἡμῖν

The words we and us refer only to James and John. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

Mark 10:37

ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου

“when you are glorified.” The phrase in your glory refers to when Jesus is glorified and rules over his kingdom. Alternate translation: “when you rule in your kingdom” (See: Metonymy)

Mark 10:38

οὐκ οἴδατε

“You do not understand”

πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω

Here, cup refers to what Jesus must suffer. Suffering is often referred to as drinking from a cup. Alternate translation: “drink the cup of suffering that I will drink” or “drink from the cup of suffering that I will drink from” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι

Here, baptism and being baptized represent suffering. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering will overwhelm Jesus. Alternate translation: “to endure the baptism of suffering which I will suffer” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 10:39

δυνάμεθα

They respond this way, meaning that they are able to drink the same cup and endure the same baptism. (See: Ellipsis)

πίεσθε

“you will drink as well”

Mark 10:40

τὸ δὲ καθίσαι ἐκ δεξιῶν μου ἢ ἐξ εὐωνύμων, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι

“But I am not the one who allows people to sit at my right hand or my left hand”

ἀλλ’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται

“but those places are for those for whom they have been prepared.” The word it refers to the places to his right hand and to his left hand.

ἡτοίμασται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” or “God has prepared them” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 10:41

ἀκούσαντες,

The word this refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hands.

Mark 10:42

προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς

“after Jesus called his disciples, he”

οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν

You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) the people in general consider these people the rulers of the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “that those whom people consider to be the rulers of the Gentiles.” (2) the Gentiles consider these people their rulers. Alternate translation: “that those whom the Gentiles think of as their rulers” (See: Active or Passive)

κατακυριεύουσιν

have control or power over

κατεξουσιάζουσιν

“flaunt their authority over.” This means that they show or use their authority in an overbearing way.

Mark 10:43

οὐχ οὕτως δέ ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν

This refers back to the previous verse about the Gentile rulers. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “But do not be like them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

μέγας γενέσθαι

“to be highly respected”

Mark 10:44

εἶναι πρῶτος

This is a metaphor for being the most important. Alternate translation: “to be the most important” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 10:45

καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἦλθεν διακονηθῆναι

You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “For even the Son of Man did not come to have people serve him” (See: Active or Passive)

διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι

“to be served by people, but to serve people”

ἀντὶ πολλῶν

“in the place of many people”

Mark 10:46

As Jesus and his disciples continue walking toward Jerusalem, Jesus heals blind Bartimaeus, who then walks with them.

ὁ υἱὸς Τιμαίου, Βαρτιμαῖος, τυφλὸς προσαίτης

“a blind beggar named Bartimaeus, the son of Timaeus.” Bartimaeus is the name of a man. Timaeus is his father’s name. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 10:47

ἀκούσας ὅτι Ἰησοῦς…ἐστιν

Bartimaeus heard people saying that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “when he heard people saying that it was Jesus” (See: Ellipsis)

Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ

Jesus is called the Son of David because he is a descendant of King David. Alternate translation: “You who are the Messiah descended from King David” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 10:48

ἐπετίμων…πολλοὶ

“many people rebuked”

πολλῷ μᾶλλον

“even more”

Mark 10:49

εἶπεν, φωνήσατε αὐτόν

You can translate this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “commanded others to call him” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

φωνοῦσι

The word they refers to the crowd.

θάρσει

“Have courage” or “Do not be afraid”

φωνεῖ σε

“Jesus is calling for you”

Mark 10:50

ἀναπηδήσας

“having jumped up”

Mark 10:51

ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ

“answering the blind man”

ἀναβλέψω

“I would be able to see”

Mark 10:52

ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε

This phrase is written this way to place emphasis on the man’s faith. Jesus heals the man because he believes that Jesus can heal him. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I am healing you because you believed in me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ

“he followed Jesus”

Mark 11

Mark 11 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 11:9-10, 17, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 21:1-7 and Mark 11:1-7 and Luke 19:29-36 and John 12:14-15)

Mark 11:1

καὶ ὅτε ἐγγίζουσιν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, εἰς Βηθφαγὴ καὶ Βηθανίαν πρὸς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν

“And when Jesus and his disciples came near to Jerusalem, they came to Bethphage and Bethany near the Mount of Olives” They had come to Bethphage and Bethany in the vicinity of Jerusalem.

Βηθφαγὴ

This is the name of a village. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 11:2

τὴν κατέναντι ὑμῶν

“ahead of us”

πῶλον

This refers to a young donkey that is large enough to carry a man.

ἐφ’ ὃν οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν

This can be written in active form. Alternate translation: “that no one has ever ridden” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 11:3

τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο?

It can be written clearly what the word this refers to. Alternate translation: “Why are you untying and taking the colt?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει

“needs it”

εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε

Jesus will send it back promptly when he is finished using it. Alternate translation: “will immediately send it back when he no longer needs it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 11:4

ἀπῆλθον

“the two disciples went away”

πῶλον

This refers to a young donkey that is large enough to carry a man. See how you translated this in Mark 11:2.

Mark 11:6

οἱ…εἶπον

“they responded”

καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς

“just as Jesus had told them to respond.” This refers to how Jesus had told them to respond to people’s questions about taking the colt.

ἀφῆκαν αὐτούς

This means that they allowed them to continue doing what they were doing. Alternate translation: “they let them take the donkey with them” (See: Idiom)

Mark 11:7

ἐπιβάλλουσιν αὐτῷ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐκάθισεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν

“laid their cloaks on its back so Jesus could ride it.” It is easier to ride a colt or a horse when there is a blanket or something similar on its back. In this case, the disciples threw their cloaks on it.

τὰ ἱμάτια

“coats” or “robes”

Mark 11:8

πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν

It was a tradition to lay garments on the road in front of important people to honor them. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “many people spread their garments on the road to honor him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν

It was a tradition to lay palm branches on the road in front of an important people to honor them. Alternate translation: “and others spread branches on the road that they had cut from the fields, also to honor him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 11:9

οἱ ἀκολουθοῦντες

“those who followed Jesus”

ὡσαννά

This word means “save us,” but people also shouted it joyfully when they wanted to praise God. You can translate it according to how it was used, or you can write Hosanna using your language’s way of spelling that word. Alternate translation: “Praise God” (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος

This is referring to Jesus. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “Blessed are you, the one” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου

This is a metonym for the Lord’s authority. Alternate translation: “with the authority of the Lord” (See: Metonymy)

εὐλογημένος

“May God bless”

Mark 11:10

εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ

“Blessed is our father David’s coming kingdom.” This refers to Jesus coming and ruling as king. Alternate translation: “Blessed be the coming of your kingdom” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ

The word blessed can be translated as an active verb. Alternate translation: “May God bless you as you rule your coming kingdom” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ

Here David’s descendant who will rule is referred to as David himself. Alternate translation: “of the greatest descendant of our father David” or “that David’s greatest descendant will rule” (See: Metonymy)

ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις

This could mean: (1) they should praise God who is in heaven. (2) those who are in heaven should shout ‘Hosanna’.

τοῖς ὑψίστοις

Here heaven is spoken of as the highest. Alternate translation: “the highest heaven” or “heaven” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 11:11

ὀψίας ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας

“because it was already late in the day”

ἐξῆλθεν εἰς Βηθανίαν μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα

“he and his twelve disciples left Jerusalem and went to Bethany”

Mark 11:12

ἐξελθόντων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ Βηθανίας

“while they were going back to Jerusalem from Bethany”

Mark 11:13

This happens while Jesus and his disciples are walking to Jerusalem.

εἰ ἄρα τι εὑρήσει ἐν αὐτῇ

“looking to see if there was any fruit on it”

οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα

Mark is using a negative expressions to emphasize that there were only leaves on the tree. Alternate translation: “he found only leaves on the tree” (See: Litotes)

οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα

This means that he did not find any figs. Alternate translation: “he did not find any figs at all on the tree” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ…καιρὸς

“the time of year”

Mark 11:14

εἶπεν αὐτῇ, μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι

Jesus speaks to the fig tree and curses it. He speaks to it so that his disciples hear him. (See: Apostrophe)

εἶπεν αὐτῇ

“he spoke to the tree”

ἤκουον οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ

The word it refers to Jesus speaking to the fig tree.

Mark 11:15

ἔρχονται

“Jesus and his disciples came”

ἤρξατο ἐκβάλλειν τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ

Jesus is forcing these people out of the temple. This can be written clearly. Alternate translation: “he began to drive the sellers and buyers out of the temple” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς ἀγοράζοντας

“the people who were buying and selling”

Mark 11:17

God had said earlier in his word, through the prophet Isaiah, that his temple would be a house of prayer for all the nations.

οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν?

Jesus is rebuking the Jewish leaders for their misuse of the temple. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is written in the scriptures that God said, ‘I want my house to be called a house where people from all nations may pray.’” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν

Jesus compares the people to robbers and the temple to a robbers’ den. Alternate translation: “But you are like robbers who have made my house into a robbers’ den” (See: Metaphor)

σπήλαιον λῃστῶν

“a cave where robbers hide”

Mark 11:18

ἐζήτουν πῶς

“they were looking for a way”

Mark 11:19

ὅταν ὀψὲ ἐγένετο

“in the evening”

ἐξεπορεύοντο ἔξω τῆς πόλεως

“Jesus and his disciples left the city”

Mark 11:20

Jesus uses the example of the fig tree to remind the disciples to have faith in God.

παραπορευόμενοι

“walking along the road”

τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν

Translate this statement to clarify that the tree died. Alternate translation: “the fig tree had withered away down to its roots and died” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐξηραμμένην

“had dried up”

Mark 11:21

ἀναμνησθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος

It may be helpful to state what Peter remembered. Alternate translation: “Peter, remembering what Jesus had said to the fig tree,” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 11:22

ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς λέγει αὐτοῖς

“Jesus replied to his disciples”

Mark 11:23

ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

“I tell you the truth.” This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.

ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ

“if anyone says”

μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ

Here, heart is a metonym for a person’s mind or inner being. Alternate translation: “if he truly believes in his heart” or “if he does not doubt but believes” (See: Metonymy)

ἔσται αὐτῷ

“God will make it happen”

Mark 11:24

διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν

“So I tell you” (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἔσται ὑμῖν

It is understood that this will happen because God will provide what you ask for. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “God will give it to you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 11:25

ὅταν στήκετε προσευχόμενοι

It is common in Hebrew culture to stand when praying to God. Alternate translation: “when you pray”

εἴ τι ἔχετε κατά τινος

“whatever grudge you have against anyone.” Here the word something refers to any grudge you hold against someone for sinning against you or any anger you have against someone.

Mark 11:27

The next day when Jesus returns to temple, he gives the chief priests, scribes, and elders an answer to their question about his casting the money changers out of the temple area, by asking them another question, which they were not willing to answer.

ἔρχονται…εἰς

“Jesus and his disciples came to”

ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ

This means that Jesus was walking around inside of the temple courtyard; he was not walking into the temple.

Mark 11:28

ἔλεγον αὐτῷ

The word they refers to the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders.

ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς?

This could mean: (1) both of these questions have the same meaning and are asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority and so can be combined. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (2) these are two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to him. (See: Parallelism)

ταῦτα

The words these things refer to Jesus turning over the sellers’ tables in the temple and speaking against what the chief priests and scribes taught. Alternate translation: “things like those you did here yesterday” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 11:30

τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου

“The baptism that John performed”

ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων

“was it authorized by heaven or by men”

ἐξ οὐρανοῦ

Here, heaven refers to God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: Metonymy)

ἐξ ἀνθρώπων

“from people”

Mark 11:31

ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ

This refers to the source of the baptism of John. Alternate translation: “If we say, ‘It was from heaven,’” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐξ οὐρανοῦ

Here, heaven refers to God. See how you translated this in Mark 11:30. Alternate translation: “From God” (See: Metonymy)

οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ

The word him refers to John the Baptist.

Mark 11:32

ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων

This refers to the source of the baptism of John. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘It was from men,’” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐξ ἀνθρώπων

“From people”

ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?

The religious leaders imply that they will suffer from the people if they give this answer. Alternate translation: “But we do not want to say that it was from men or the crowd may attack us.” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων?

The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understood what would happen if they said John’s baptism was not from God. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good.” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον

The author, Mark, explains why the religious leaders did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men. You can state this clearly. “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the people” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 11:33

οὐκ οἴδαμεν

This refers to the baptism of John. This understood information may be supplied. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John came from” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 12

Mark 12 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Hypothetical Situations

Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so they learn what their hearers think is good and bad or right and wrong. (See: Hypothetical Situations)

Mark 12:1

Jesus speaks this parable against the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders. (See: Parables)

καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν

The word them here refers to the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders to whom Jesus had been talking in the previous chapter.

περιέθηκεν φραγμὸν

He put a barrier around the vineyard. It could have been a row of shrubs, a fence, or a stone wall.

ὤρυξεν ὑπολήνιον

This means that he carved a pit on the rock, which would be the bottom part of the winepress used for collecting the squeezed grape juice. Alternate translation: “carved a pit into rock for the winepress” or “he made a vat to collect the juice from the winepress” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς

The owner still owned the vineyard, but he allowed the vine growers to take care of it. When the grapes became ripe, they were to give some of them to the owner and keep the rest.

Mark 12:2

τῷ καιρῷ

This refers to the time of harvest. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “when the time came to harvest the grapes” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:3

καὶ λαβόντες αὐτὸν

“But after the vine growers grabbed the slave”

κενόν

This means that they did not give him any of the fruit. Alternate translation: “without any grapes” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:4

ἀπέστειλεν πρὸς αὐτοὺς

“the owner of the vineyard sent to the vine growers”

κἀκεῖνον ἐκεφαλίωσαν

This can be written more clearly. Alternate translation: “and they beat that one on the head, and they hurt him terribly” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:5

ἄλλον…κἀκεῖνον ἀπέκτειναν; καὶ πολλοὺς ἄλλους

These phrases refer to other slaves. Alternate translation: “yet another slave, and they killed him, and many other slaves” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 12:6

υἱὸν ἀγαπητόν

It is implied that this is the owner’s son. Alternate translation: “his beloved son” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:7

ὁ κληρονόμος

This is the owner’s heir, who would inherit the vineyard after his father died. Alternate translation: “the owner’s heir” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἡ κληρονομία

The tenants are referring to the vineyard as the inheritance. Alternate translation: “this vineyard” (See: Synecdoche)

Mark 12:8

λαβόντες

“after the vine growers seized the son”

Mark 12:9

τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος?

Jesus asks a question and then gives the answer to teach the people. The question may be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “So I will tell you what the owner of the vineyard will do.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὖν

Jesus has finished telling the parable and is now asking the people what they think will happen next. (See: Connecting Words and Phrases)

ἀπολέσει

kill

δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις

The word others refers to other vine growers who will care for the vineyard. Alternate translation: “he will give the vineyard to other vine growers to care for it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:10

This scripture was written long before in God’s word.

οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε:

Jesus reminds the people of a scripture passage. He uses a rhetorical question here to rebuke them. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read this scripture.” or “And you should remember this scripture.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord made into the cornerstone”

Mark 12:11

παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη

“The Lord has done this”

ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν

Here, in our eyes stands for seeing, which is a metaphor for the people’s opinion. Alternate translation: “we have seen it and think that it is marvelous” or “we think that it is wonderful” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 12:12

ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι

Here, they refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders. This group may be referred to as “the Jewish leaders.”

ἐζήτουν

“they wanted”

καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον

They were afraid of what the crowd would do to them if they arrested Jesus. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “but they feared what the crowd would do if they arrested him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πρὸς αὐτοὺς

“to accuse them”

Mark 12:13

In an effort to trap Jesus, some of the Pharisees and Herodians, and then the Sadducees, come to Jesus with questions.

καὶ ἀποστέλλουσιν

“Then the Jewish leaders sent”

τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν

This was the name of an informal political party that supported Herod Antipas.

ἵνα αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσιν

Here the author describes tricking Jesus as “trapping him.” Alternate translation: “to trick him” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 12:14

λέγουσιν

Here, they refers to those sent from among the Pharisees and the Herodians.

οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός

The negation can modify the verb. Alternate translation: “you do not care about people’s opinions” (See: Litotes)

οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός

This is an idiom that means that Jesus does not show favoritism. Alternate translation: “you are not concerned with earning people’s favor” (See: Idiom)

Mark 12:15

ὁ…εἰδὼς αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν

They were acting hypocritically. This can be explained more clearly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, knowing that they did not really want to know what God wanted them to do” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τί με πειράζετε?

Jesus rebukes the Jewish leaders because they were trying to trick him. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “I know you are trying to make me say something wrong so you can accuse me.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

δηνάριον

This coin was worth a day’s wages. (See: Biblical Money)

Mark 12:16

οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν

“So the Pharisees and the Herodians brought a denarius”

ἡ εἰκὼν αὕτη καὶ ἡ ἐπιγραφή

“is this picture and name”

οἱ…εἶπαν αὐτῷ, Καίσαρος

Here, Caesar’s refers to his likeness and inscription. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘They are Caesar’s likeness and inscription” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 12:17

τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρι

Jesus is teaching that his people must respect the government by paying taxes. This figure of speech can be clarified by changing Caesar to Roman government. Alternate translation: “Give to the Roman government the things that belong to the Roman government” (See: Metonymy)

καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ

The understood verb may be supplied. Alternate translation: “and give to God the things of God” (See: Ellipsis)

ἐξεθαύμαζον ἐπ’ αὐτῷ

They were amazed at what Jesus had said. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “they marveled at him and at what he had said” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:18

οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι

This phrase explains who the Sadducees were. This can be written more clearly. Alternate translation: “who say there is no resurrection from the dead” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:19

Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ

The Sadducees are quoting what Moses had written in the law. Moses’ quote can be expressed as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote for us that if a man’s brother dies” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν

“wrote to us Jews.” The Sadducees were a group of Jews. Here they use the word us to refer to themselves and all Jews.

λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα

“the man should marry his brother’s wife”

ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ

“have a son for his brother.” The man’s first son would be considered to be the dead brother’s son, and the son’s descendants would be considered to be the dead brother’s descendants. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “should have a son who will be considered to be the dead brother’s son” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:20

ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἦσαν

The Sadducees talk about a situation that did not really happen because they want Jesus to tell them what he thinks is right and wrong. Alternate translation: “Suppose there were seven brothers” (See: Hypothetical Situations)

ὁ πρῶτος

the first brother

ὁ πρῶτος ἔλαβεν γυναῖκα

“the first married a woman.” Here marrying a woman is spoken of as “taking” her.

Mark 12:21

ὁ δεύτερος…ὁ τρίτος

These numbers refer to each of the brothers and can be expressed as such. Alternate translation: “the second brother … the third brother” (See: Ellipsis)

ὁ δεύτερος ἔλαβεν αὐτήν

“the second married her.” Here marrying a woman is spoken of as “taking” her.

ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως

It may be helpful to explain what likewise means. Alternate translation: “the third brother married her as his other bothers did, and he also died leaving no children” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:22

οἱ ἑπτὰ

This refers to all the brothers. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: Ellipsis)

οἱ ἑπτὰ οὐκ ἀφῆκαν σπέρμα

Each of the brothers married the woman and then died before he had any children with her. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “eventually all seven brothers married that woman one by one, but none of them had any children with her, and one by one they died” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:23

ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει, ὅταν ἀναστῶσιν, τίνος αὐτῶν ἔσται γυνή

The Sadducees are testing Jesus by asking this question. If your readers can only understand this as a request for information, this can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Now tell us whose wife she will be in the resurrection, when they all rise again.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 12:24

οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ?

Jesus rebukes the Sadducees because they are mistaken about God’s law. This may be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “You are mistaken because you do not know the scriptures nor the power of God.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς

This means that they do not understand what is written in the Old Testament scriptures.

τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ

“how powerful God is”

Mark 12:25

ὅταν γὰρ…ἀναστῶσιν

Here the word they refers to the brothers and the woman from the example.

ἀναστῶσιν

Waking and getting up from sleep is a metaphor for becoming alive after having been dead. (See: Metaphor)

ἐκ νεκρῶν

From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.

οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται

“they do not marry, and they are not given in marriage”

γαμίζονται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and no one gives them in marriage” (See: Active or Passive)

τοῖς οὐρανοῖς

This refers to the place where God lives.

Mark 12:26

ὅτι ἐγείρονται

This can be expressed with an active verb. Alternate translation: “who rise” or “who rise to live again” (See: Active or Passive)

τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως

“the book that Moses wrote”

τοῦ βάτου

This refers to the part of the Book of Moses that tells about when God spoke to Moses out of a bush that was burning but that did not burn up. Alternate translation: “the passage about the burning bush” or “the words about the fiery bush” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦ βάτου

This refers to a shrub, a woody plant that is smaller than a tree.

πῶς εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ Θεὸς

“about when God spoke to Moses”

ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ

This means that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob worship God. These men have died physically, but they are still alive spiritually and still worship God.

Mark 12:27

Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων

Here, the dead refers to people who are dead, and the living refers to people who are alive. Alternate translation: “not the God of dead people, but of living people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Θεὸς νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων

You can state the God clearly in the second phrase. Alternate translation: “not the God of dead people, but the God of living people” (See: Ellipsis)

ζώντων

This includes people who are alive physically and spiritually.

πολὺ πλανᾶσθε

It may be helpful to state what they are lead astray about. Alternate translation: “When you say that dead people do not rise again, you are quite mistaken” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πολὺ πλανᾶσθε

“You are completely mistaken” or “You are very wrong”

Mark 12:28

ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτόν

“the scribe asked Jesus”

Mark 12:29

πρώτη ἐστίν

Here, The first refers to the most important commandment. Alternate translation: “The most important commandment is” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ἄκουε, Ἰσραήλ, Κύριος ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν

“Listen, O Israel! The Lord our God is one Lord”

Mark 12:30

ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου

These four phrases are used together to mean “completely” or “earnestly.” (See: Doublet)

ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου

Here, heart and “soul” are metonyms for a person’s inner being. (See: Metonymy)

Mark 12:31

ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν

Jesus uses this simile to compare how people are to love each other with the same love as they love themselves. Alternate translation: “You must love your neighbor as much as you love yourself” (See: Simile)

τούτων

Here the word these refers to the two commandments that Jesus had just told the people.

Mark 12:32

καλῶς, Διδάσκαλε

“Good answer, Teacher” or “Well said, Teacher”

εἷς ἐστιν

This means that there is only one God. Alternate translation: “there is only one God” (See: Idiom)

οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος

The word “God” is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “that there is no other God” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 12:33

ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας…ἐξ ὅλης τῆς συνέσεως…ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος

These three phrases are used together to mean “completely” or “earnestly.” (See: Doublet)

ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας

Here, heart is a metonym for person’s thoughts, feelings, or inner being. (See: Metonymy)

τὸ ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον ὡς ἑαυτὸν

This simile compares how people are to love each other with the same love that they love themselves. Alternate translation: “to love your neighbor as much as you love yourself” (See: Simile)

περισσότερόν ἐστιν

This idiom means that something is more important than something else. In this case, these two commandments are more pleasing to God that burnt offering and sacrifices. This may be written clearly. Alternate translation: “is even more important than” or “is even more pleasing to God than” (See: Idiom)

Mark 12:34

οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ

You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “You are very close to the kingdom of God” (See: Litotes)

οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ

Here Jesus speaks of the man being ready to submit to God as king as being physically close to the kingdom of God, as if it where a physical place. Alternate translation: “You are close to submitting to God as king” (See: Metaphor)

οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα

You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “everyone was afraid” (See: Litotes)

Mark 12:35

ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἔλεγεν διδάσκων ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ

Some time has passed and Jesus is now in the temple. This is not part of the previous conversation. Alternate translation: “And later, while Jesus was teaching in the temple area, he said to the people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν?

Jesus uses this question to get the people to think deeply about the Psalm he is about to quote. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Consider why the scribes say the Christ is the son of David.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

υἱὸς Δαυείδ

“a descendant of David”

Mark 12:36

αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ

This word himself refers to David and is used to place emphasis on him and what he said. Alternate translation: “It was David who” (See: Reflexive Pronouns)

ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ

This means that he was inspired by the Holy Spirit. That is, the Holy Spirit directed David in what he said. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: Idiom)

εἶπεν…εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου

Here David calls God The Lord and calls the Christ my Lord. This can be written more clearly. Alternate translation: “said about the Christ, ‘The Lord God said to my Lord” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου

Jesus is quoting a psalm. Here God is speaking to the Christ. To sit at the right hand of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: Symbolic Action)

ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου

In this quote, God speaks of defeating enemies as placing them under his feet. Alternate translation: “until I completely defeat your enemies” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 12:37

λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον

Here the word him refers to the Christ.

καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν?

This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “so consider how the Christ can be a descendant of David” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 12:38

ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς

The noun greetings can be expressed with the verb “greet.” Alternate translation: “for people to greet them in the marketplaces” (See: Abstract Nouns)

ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς

These greetings showed that the people respected the scribes. Alternate translation: “to be greeted respectfully in the marketplaces” or “for people to greet them respectfully in the marketplaces” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:40

οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν

Here Jesus describes the scribes’ cheating of widows and stealing of their houses as “devouring” their houses. Alternate translation: “They also cheat widows in order to steal their houses from them” (See: Metaphor)

τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν

The words widows and houses are synecdoches for helpless people and all of a person’s important possessions, respectively. Alternate translation: “everything from helpless people” (See: Synecdoche)

οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will certainly punish them with greater condemnation” or “God will certainly punish them severely” (See: Active or Passive)

λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα

The word greater implies a comparison. Here the comparison is to other men who are punished. Alternate translation: “will receive greater condemnation than other people” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 12:41

Still in the temple area, Jesus comments on the value of the widow’s offering.

τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου

This box, which everyone could use, was the place into which people gave offerings to the temple.

Mark 12:42

λεπτὰ δύο

“two small copper coins.” These were the least valuable coins available. (See: Biblical Money)

ἐστιν κοδράντης

“are worth very little.” A quadrans is worth very little. Translate quadrans with the name of the smallest coin in your language if you have one that is worth very little.

Mark 12:43

In verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he tells his reason for saying that. The information can be reordered so that Jesus tells his reason first and then says that the widow put in more, as in the UST. (See: Verse Bridges)

προσκαλεσάμενος

“when Jesus had called”

ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in Mark 3:28.

πάντων…τῶν βαλλόντων εἰς

“all the other people who put money into”

Mark 12:44

τοῦ περισσεύοντος

much wealth, many valuable things

τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς

“her lack” or “the little she had”

τὸν βίον αὐτῆς

“she had to survive on”

Mark 13

Mark 13 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24-25, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

The return of Christ

Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned (Mark 13:6-37). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time.

Mark 13:1

As they leave the temple area, Jesus tells his disciples what will happen in the future to the wonderful temple that Herod the Great has built.

ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί

The stones refer to the stones that the buildings were built with. Alternate translation: “What wonderful buildings and the wonderful stones that they are made of” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 13:2

βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς? οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον

This question is used to draw attention to the buildings. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings! Not one stone will be left stacked on top of another” or “You see these great buildings now, but not a single stone will be left” (See: Rhetorical Question)

οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ

It is implied that enemy soldiers will tear down the stones. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Not one stone will remain on top of another, for enemy soldiers will come and destroy these buildings” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 13:3

In answer to the disciples’ questions about the temple’s destruction and what was going to happen, Jesus tells them what was going to take place in the future.

καὶ καθημένου αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ…Πέτρος

It can be expressed clearly that Jesus and his disciples had walked to the Mount of Olives. Alternate translation: “And after arriving at the Mount of Olives, which is opposite the temple, Jesus sat down. Then Peter” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

κατ’ ἰδίαν

when they were alone

Mark 13:4

πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα

This refers to what Jesus had just said will happen to the stones of the temple. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “when will these things happen to the buildings of the temple, and what will be the sign that these things are about to happen to the temple buildings” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὅταν…ταῦτα…πάντα

“that all these things”

Mark 13:5

λέγειν αὐτοῖς

“to say to his disciples”

ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ

Here, lead you astray is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe what is not true. Alternate translation: “deceives you” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 13:6

πολλοὺς πλανήσουσιν

Here, will lead many astray is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe what is not true. Alternate translation: “they will deceive many people” (See: Metaphor)

ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου

This could mean: (1) they would be claiming his authority. (2) they would be claiming that God had sent them. (See: Metonymy)

ἐγώ εἰμι

“I am the Christ”

Mark 13:7

ἀκούσητε πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων

“you may hear of wars and reports about wars.” This could mean: (1) they would hear the sounds of wars close by and news of wars far away. (2) they would hear of wars that have started and reports about wars that are about to start.

ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος

“but it is not yet the end” or “but the end will not happen until later” or “but the end will be later”

τὸ τέλος

This probably refers to the end of the world. (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 13:8

ἐγερθήσεται…ἐπ’

This idiom means to fight against one another. Alternate translation: “will fight against” (See: Idiom)

βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν

The words “will rise” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “kingdom will rise against kingdom” or “the people of one kingdom will fight against the people of another kingdom” (See: Ellipsis)

ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα

Jesus speaks of these disasters as the beginnings of birth pains because more severe things will happen after them. Alternate translation: “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to bear a child” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 13:9

βλέπετε δὲ ὑμεῖς ἑαυτούς

“But be ready for what people will do to you”

παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς συνέδρια

“They will take you and put you under the control of councils”

δαρήσεσθε

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people will beat you” (See: Active or Passive)

ἐπὶ…σταθήσεσθε

This means to be put on trial and judged. Alternate translation: “you will be put on trial before” or “you will be brought to trial and judged by” (See: Idiom)

εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς

This means the disciples will testify about Jesus. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “and will testify to them about me” or “and you will tell them about me” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 13:10

καὶ εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη πρῶτον δεῖ κηρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον

Jesus is still speaking about things that must happen before the end comes. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “But the gospel must first be proclaimed to all the nations before the end will come” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 13:11

παραδιδόντες

Here this means to put people under the control of the authorities. Alternate translation: “giving you over to the authorities” (See: Idiom)

ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον

The words “will speak” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 13:12

παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον

“one brother will put another brother under the control of people who will kill him” or “brothers will put their brothers under the control of people who will kill them.” This will happen many times to many different people. Jesus is not speaking of just one person and his brother.

ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν

These refers to both brothers and sisters. Alternate translation: “people … their siblings” (See: When Masculine Words Include Women)

πατὴρ τέκνον

The words “will deliver up to death” are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “fathers will deliver up their children to death” (See: Ellipsis)

πατὴρ τέκνον

This means that some fathers will betray their children, and this betrayal will cause their children to be killed. Alternate translation: “fathers will betray their children, handing them over to be killed” (See: Idiom)

ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς

This means that children will oppose their parents and betray them. Alternate translation: “children will oppose their parents” (See: Idiom)

θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς

This means that the authorities will sentence the parents to be put to death. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “cause the authorities to sentence the parents to die” or “the authorities will kill the parents” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 13:13

ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone will hate you” (See: Active or Passive)

διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου

Jesus uses the metonym my name to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you believe in me” (See: Metonymy)

ὁ…ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whoever endures to the end, God will save that person” or “God will save whoever endures to the end” (See: Active or Passive)

ὁ…ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος

Here, endures represents continuing to be faithful to God even while suffering. Alternate translation: “whoever suffers and stays faithful to God to the end” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

εἰς τέλος

This could refer to: (1) the end of his life. (2) the end of that time of trouble.

Mark 13:14

τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως

This phrase is from the book of Daniel. His audience would have been familiar with this passage and the prophecy about the abomination entering the temple and defiling it. Alternate translation: “the shameful thing that defiles the things of God” (See: Metaphor)

ἑστηκότα ὅπου οὐ δεῖ

Jesus’ audience would have known that this refers to the temple. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple, where it should not be standing” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω

This is not Jesus speaking. Matthew added this to get the readers’ attention, so that they would listen to this warning. Alternate translation: “may everyone who is reading this pay attention to this warning” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 13:15

ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος

Where Jesus lived, the tops of houses were flat, and people could stand on them.

Mark 13:16

ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω

This refers to returning to his house. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the one who is in the field should not return to his house” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 13:17

ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις

This is a polite way to say that someone is pregnant. Alternate translation: “to women who are pregnant” (See: Euphemism)

Mark 13:18

προσεύχεσθε…ἵνα

“pray that these times” or “pray that these things”

χειμῶνος

“in the cold season” or “in the cold, rainy season.” This refers to the time of year when it is cold and unpleasant and difficult to travel.

Mark 13:19

οἵα οὐ γέγονεν τοιαύτη

“there has never been a worse time.” This describes how great and terrible the tribulation will be. There has never been a tribulation as terrible as this one will be.

οὐ μὴ γένηται

“there will never be days like these again” or “after that tribulation, there will never again be a tribulation like it”

Mark 13:20

μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν…τὰς ἡμέρας

“did not shorten the time.” It may be helpful to specify which days are referred to. Alternate translation: “had not reduced the days of suffering” or “had not shortened the time of suffering” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ

The word flesh refers to people, and saved refers to physical salvation. Alternate translation: “no one would be saved” or “everyone would die” (See: Synecdoche)

διὰ τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς

“in order to help the elect”

τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς, οὓς ἐξελέξατο

The phrase whom he chose means the same thing as the elect. Together, they emphasize that God chose these people. (See: Doublet)

Mark 13:21

In verse 21 Jesus gives a command, and in 22 he tells the reason for the command. This can be reordered with the reason first, and the command second, as in the UST. (See: Verse Bridges)

Mark 13:22

ψευδόχριστοι

“people who claim they are Christ”

πρὸς τὸ ἀποπλανᾶν

“in order to deceive” or “hoping to deceive” or “trying to deceive”

πρὸς τὸ ἀποπλανᾶν εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς

The phrase even the elect implies that the false Christs and false prophets will expect to deceive some people, but they will not know if they will be able to deceive the elect. Alternate translation: “in order to deceive people, and even deceive the elect, if that is possible” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 13:23

ὑμεῖς δὲ βλέπετε

“Be watchful” or “Be alert”

προείρηκα ὑμῖν πάντα

Jesus told them these things to warn them. Alternate translation: “I have told you all these things ahead of time to warn you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 13:24

ὁ ἥλιος σκοτισθήσεται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the sun will become dark” (See: Active or Passive)

ἡ σελήνη οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὐτῆς

Here the moon is spoken of as if it were alive and able to give something to someone else. Alternate translation: “the moon will not shine” or “the moon will be dark” (See: Personification)

Mark 13:25

οἱ ἀστέρες ἔσονται ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πίπτοντες

This does not mean that they will fall to earth but that they will fall from where the are now. Alternate translation: “the stars will fall from their places in the sky” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσονται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the powers in the heavens will shake” or “God will shake the powers that are in the heavens” (See: Active or Passive)

αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς

“the powerful things in the heavens.” This could refer to: (1) the sun, moon, and stars. (2) powerful spiritual beings.

ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς

“in the sky”

Mark 13:26

τότε ὄψονται

“then people will see”

μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης

“powerfully and gloriously”

Mark 13:27

ἐπισυνάξει

The word he refers to God and is a metonym for his angels, as they are the ones who will gather the elect. Alternate translation: “they will gather” or “his angels will gather” (See: Metonymy)

τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων

The whole earth is spoken of as the four winds, which refer to the four directions: north, south, east, and west. Alternate translation: “the north, south, east, and west” or “all parts of the earth” (See: Metaphor)

ἀπ’ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ

These two extremes are given to emphasize that the elect will be gathered from the entire earth. Alternate translation: “from every place on earth” (See: Merism)

Mark 13:28

Jesus gives two short parables here to remind people to be aware when the things that he has been explaining happen. (See: Parables)

ἁπαλὸς

“green and soft”

ἐκφύῃ τὰ φύλλα

Here the fig tree is spoken of as if it were alive and able to willingly cause its leaves to grow. Alternate translation: “its leaves begin to sprout” (See: Personification)

τὸ θέρος

the warm part of the year or the growing season

Mark 13:29

ταῦτα

This refers to the days of tribulation. Alternate translation: “these things I have just described” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἐγγύς ἐστιν

“the Son of Man is near”

ἐπὶ θύραις

This idiom means that he is very near and has almost arrived, referring to a traveler being close to arriving at the city gates. Alternate translation: “and is almost here” (See: Idiom)

Mark 13:30

ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

This indicates that the statement that follows is especially important. See how you translated this in Mark 3:28.

οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ

This is a polite way to talk about someone dying. Alternate translation: “will not die” or “will not end” (See: Euphemism)

μέχρις οὗ ταῦτα πάντα

The phrase these things refers to the days of tribulation.

Mark 13:31

ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ

The two extremes are given to refer to all of the sky, including the sun, moon, stars, and planets, and all of the earth. Alternate translation: “The sky, the earth, and everything in them” (See: Merism)

παρελεύσονται

“will cease to exist.” Here this phrase refers to the world ending.

οἱ…λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται

Jesus speaks of words not losing their power as if they were something that will never physically die. Alternate translation: “my words will never lose their power” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 13:32

τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας

This refers to the time that the Son of Man will return. Alternate translation: “that day or that hour that the Son of Man will return” or “the day or the hour that I will return” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐδεὶς οἶδεν; οὐδὲ οἱ ἄγγελοι ἐν οὐρανῷ, οὐδὲ ὁ Υἱός, εἰ μὴ ὁ Πατήρ

These words specify some of those who do not know when the Son of Man will return, different from the Father, who does know. Alternate translation: “no one knows—neither the angels in heaven nor the Son know—but the Father” or “neither the angels in heaven nor the Son know; no one knows but the Father” (See: Ellipsis)

οἱ ἄγγελοι ἐν οὐρανῷ

Here, heaven refers to the place where God lives.

εἰ μὴ ὁ Πατήρ

It is best to translate Father with the same word that your language naturally uses to refer to a human father. Also, this is an ellipsis, stating that the Father knows when the Son will return. Alternate translation: “but only the Father knows” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 13:33

πότε ὁ καιρός ἐστιν

You can state this clearly what time refers to here. Alternate translation: “when all these events will happen” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 13:35

ἢ ὀψὲ

“he could return in the evening”

ἀλεκτοροφωνίας

The rooster is a bird that crows very early in the morning by making a loud call.

Mark 13:36

εὕρῃ ὑμᾶς καθεύδοντας

Here Jesus speaks of not being ready as sleeping. Alternate translation: “find you not ready for his return” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 14

Mark 14 General Notes

Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament.

Special concepts in this chapter

The eating of the body and blood

Mark 14:22-25 describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion” to remember this meal.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Abba, Father

“Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

“Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter (Mark 14:20). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: Son of Man, son of man and First, Second or Third Person)

Mark 14:1

Just two days before the Passover, the chief priests and scribes are secretly plotting to kill Jesus.

ἐν δόλῳ

without people noticing

Mark 14:2

ἔλεγον γάρ

The word they refers to the chief priests and the scribes.

μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ

This refers to them not arresting Jesus during the Passover festival. Alternate translation: “We must not do it during the festival” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 14:3

Though some were angry that the oil was used to anoint Jesus, Jesus says that the woman has anointed his body for burial before he will die.

Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ

This man previously had leprosy but was no longer ill. This is a different man than Simon Peter and Simon the Zealot. (See: How to Translate Names)

κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ

In Jesus’ culture, when people gathered to eat, they reclined on their sides, propping themselves up on pillows beside a low table.

ἀλάβαστρον

This is a jar made from alabaster. Alabaster was a very expensive yellow-white stone. Alternate translation: “beautiful white stone jar” (See: Translate Unknowns)

μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς

“that contained expensive, fragrant perfume called nard.” Nard was a very expensive, sweet-smelling oil used to make perfume. (See: Translate Unknowns)

αὐτοῦ τῆς κεφαλῆς

“Jesus’ head”

Mark 14:4

εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν?

They asked this question to show that they disapproved of the woman pouring the perfume on Jesus. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is terrible that she wasted that perfume!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 14:5

ἠδύνατο…τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραθῆναι

Mark wants to show his readers that those present were mainly concerned about money. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we could have sold this perfume” or “she could have sold this perfume” (See: Active or Passive)

δηναρίων τριακοσίων

Denarii are Roman silver coins. (See: Biblical Money)

δηναρίων τριακοσίων

“three hundred denarii.” (See: Numbers)

δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς

The phrase the poor refers to poor people. Alternate translation: “given to poor people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς

This refers to giving the money from the sale of the perfume to the poor. Alternate translation: “the money given to poor people” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 14:6

τί αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε?

Jesus rebukes the guests for questioning this woman’s action. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not trouble her!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 14:7

τοὺς πτωχοὺς

This refers to poor people. Alternate translation: “poor people” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

Mark 14:9

ἀμὴν…λέγω ὑμῖν

This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in Mark 3:28.

ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “wherever my followers preach the gospel” (See: Active or Passive)

καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη, λαληθήσεται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people will speak about what this woman has done” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 14:10

After the woman anoints Jesus with perfume, Judas promises to deliver Jesus to the chief priests.

ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδοῖ αὐτοῖς

Judas did not deliver Jesus to them yet, rather he went to make arrangements with them. Alternate translation: “in order to arrange with them that he would deliver Jesus over to them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

αὐτὸν παραδοῖ

“he would bring Jesus to them so they could capture him”

Mark 14:11

οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες

It may be helpful to state clearly what the chief priests heard. Alternate translation: “But when the chief priests heard what he was willing to do for them” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:12

Jesus sends two of the disciples to prepare the Passover meal.

ὅτε τὸ Πάσχα ἔθυον

At the beginning of the Festival of Unleavened Bread, it was customary to sacrifice a lamb. Alternate translation: “when it was customary to sacrifice the Passover lamb” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

φάγῃς τὸ Πάσχα

Here the Passover refers to the Passover meal. Alternate translation: “eat the Passover meal” (See: Metonymy)

Mark 14:13

κεράμιον ὕδατος βαστάζων

“carrying a large jar full of water”

Mark 14:14

ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω?

This can be written as an indirect quote. Translate this so that it is a polite request. Alternate translation: “Our Teacher would like to know where the guest room is where he may eat the Passover with his disciples.” (See: Direct and Indirect Quotations)

τὸ κατάλυμά

a room for visitors

Mark 14:15

ἐκεῖ ἑτοιμάσατε ἡμῖν

They were to prepare the meal for Jesus and his disciples to eat. Alternate translation: “prepare the meal for us there” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:16

ἐξῆλθον οἱ μαθηταὶ

“the two disciples left”

καθὼς εἶπεν

“just as Jesus had said”

Mark 14:17

That evening as Jesus and the disciples eat the Passover meal, Jesus tells them that one of them will betray him.

ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα

It may be helpful to state where they came to. Alternate translation: “he came with the Twelve to the house” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:18

ἀνακειμένων αὐτῶν

In Jesus’ culture, when people gathered to eat, they lay down on their sides, propping themselves up on pillows beside a low table.

ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in Mark 3:28.

Mark 14:19

εἷς κατὰ εἷς

This means that “one at a time” each disciple asked him.

μήτι ἐγώ?

This could be: (1) a question for which the disciples expected the answer to be no. (2) a rhetorical question that did not require a response. Alternate translation: “Surely I am not the one who will betray you!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 14:20

εἷς τῶν δώδεκα

“He is one of the twelve of you”

ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον

In Jesus’ culture, people would often eat bread, dipping it in a shared bowl of sauce or of oil mixed with herbs.

Mark 14:21

ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ

Here Jesus refers to the scriptures prophesying about his death. If you have a polite way to talk about death in your language, use it here. Alternate translation: “For the Son of Man will die in the way that the scriptures say”

δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται

You can state this more directly. Alternate translation: “who is betraying the Son of Man” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:22

ἄρτον

This was a flat loaf of unleavened bread, which was eaten as part of the Passover meal.

ἔκλασεν

This means that he broke the bread into pieces for the people to eat. Alternate translation: “broke it into pieces” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

λάβετε, τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου

“Take this bread. It is my body.” Though most understand this to mean that the bread is a symbol of Jesus’ body and that it is not actual flesh, it is best to translate this statement literally. (See: Symbolic Language)

Mark 14:23

λαβὼν ποτήριον

Here, cup is a metonym for wine. Alternate translation: “having taken the cup of wine” (See: Synecdoche)

Mark 14:24

τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν

The covenant is for the forgiveness of sins. This can be written more explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is my blood that confirms the covenant, the blood that is poured out so that many may receive the forgiveness of sins” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου

“This wine is my blood.” Though most understand this to mean that the wine is a symbol of Jesus’ blood and that it is not actual blood, it is best to translate this statement literally. (See: Symbolic Language)

Mark 14:25

ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν

This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in Mark 3:28.

ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου

“wine.” This is a descriptive way to refer to wine.

καινὸν

This could mean: (1) it would happen again. (2) it would happen in a new way.

Mark 14:26

ὑμνήσαντες

A hymn is a type of song. It was traditional for them to sing an Old Testament psalm.

Mark 14:27

λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς

“Jesus said to his disciples”

σκανδαλισθήσεσθε

This is an idiom that means leave. Alternate translation: “will leave me” (See: Idiom)

πατάξω

“I will kill.” Here, I refers to God.

τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I will scatter the sheep” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 14:28

Jesus clearly tells Peter he will deny him. Peter and all of the disciples are certain they will not deny Jesus.

ἐγερθῆναί με

This idiom means that God will cause Jesus to become alive again after he has died. Alternate translation: “I am made alive again” (See: Idiom)

τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με

This can be written in active form. Alternate translation: “God raises me from the dead” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 14:29

εἰ καὶ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐγώ

In the phrase yet not I, the words “fall away” are implied Alternate translation: “Even if everyone else leaves you, I will not leave you” (See: Ellipsis)

εἰ καὶ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐγώ

The implied phrase “yet I will not fall away” is a double negative and carries a positive meaning. This can be expressed in the positive if needed. Alternate translation: “Even if everyone else leaves you, I will stay with you” (See: Double Negatives)

Mark 14:30

ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι

This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in Mark 3:28.

ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι

The rooster is a bird that calls out very early in the morning. The loud sound he makes is “crowing.”

σὺ…με ἀπαρνήσῃ

“you will say that you do not know me”

Mark 14:31

ἐὰν δέῃ με συναποθανεῖν

“Even if I must die with”

ὡσαύτως…καὶ πάντες ἔλεγον

This means that all of the disciples said the same thing that Peter said.

Mark 14:32

When they go to Gethsemane on the Mount of Olives, Jesus encourages three of his disciples to stay awake while he prays. Twice he awakens them, and the third time he tells them to wake up because it is time for the betrayal.

ἔρχονται εἰς χωρίον

The word they refers to Jesus and his disciples.

Mark 14:33

ἐκθαμβεῖσθαι

to be overwhelmed with sorrow

ἀδημονεῖν

The word deeply refers to Jesus being greatly troubled in his soul. Alternate translation: “extremely troubled” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 14:34

ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου

Jesus speaks of himself as his soul. Alternate translation: “I am” (See: Synecdoche)

ἕως θανάτου

Jesus is exaggerating because he feels so much distress and sorrow that he feels like he is about to die, though he knows he will not die until after the sun rises. (See: Hyperbole)

γρηγορεῖτε

The disciples were to stay alert while Jesus prayed. This does not mean that they were supposed to watch Jesus pray.

Mark 14:35

εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν

This means that if God would allow it to happen. Alternate translation: “if God would allow it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

παρέλθῃ…ἡ ὥρα

Here, the hour refers to Jesus’ time of suffering, both now in the garden and later. Alternate translation: “that he would not have to go through this time of suffering” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:36

Ἀββά

a term used by Jewish children to address their father. Since it is followed by “Father,” it is best to transliterate this word. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

ὁ Πατήρ

This is an important title for God. (See: Translating Son and Father)

παρένεγκε τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ

Jesus speaks of the suffering that he must endure as if it were a cup. (See: Metonymy)

ἀλλ’ οὐ τί ἐγὼ θέλω, ἀλλὰ τί σύ

Jesus is asking God to do what he wants to be done and not what Jesus wants. Alternate translation: “But do not do what I want, do what you want” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 14:37

εὑρίσκει αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας

The word them refers to Peter, James, and John.

Σίμων, καθεύδεις? οὐκ ἴσχυσας μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι?

Jesus rebukes Simon Peter for sleeping. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Simon, you are asleep when I told you to stay awake. You could not even stay awake for one hour.” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 14:38

ἵνα μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν

Jesus speaks of being tempted as if it were entering into a physical place. Alternate translation: “so that you may not be tempted” (See: Metaphor)

τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής

Jesus warns Simon Peter that he is not strong enough to do what he wants to do in his own strength. Alternate translation: “You are willing in your spirit, but you are too weak to do what you want to do” or “You want to do what I say, but you are weak”

τὸ…πνεῦμα…ἡ…σὰρξ

These refer to two different aspects of Peter. Here, the spirit is his inmost desires and the flesh is his human ability and strength. (See: Metonymy)

Mark 14:39

τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπών

“having prayed again what he prayed before”

Mark 14:40

εὗρεν αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας

The word them refers to Peter, James, and John.

ἦσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι

Here the author speaks of a sleepy person having a hard time keeping his eyes open as having eyes that are weighed down. Alternate translation: “for they were so sleepy they were having a hard time keeping their eyes open” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 14:41

ἔρχεται τὸ τρίτον

Jesus had gone and prayed again. Then he returned to them a third time. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “he went and prayed again. He returned the third time” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε.

Jesus rebukes his disciples for not staying awake and praying. You can translate this rhetorical question as a statement if needed. Alternate translation: “You are still sleeping and resting!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα

The time of Jesus’ suffering and betrayal is about to begin.

ἰδοὺ

“Listen”

παραδίδοται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου

Jesus warns his disciples that his betrayer is approaching them. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone is betraying me, the Son of Man” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 14:43

Verse 44 gives background information about how Judas had arranged with the Jewish leaders to betray Jesus. (See: Background Information)

Judas betrays Jesus with a kiss, and the disciples all flee.

Mark 14:44

δὲ ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν

This refers to Judas.

αὐτός ἐστιν

This refers to the man that Judas was going to identify. Alternate translation: “he is the one you want” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:45

κατεφίλησεν αὐτόν

“Judas kissed him”

Mark 14:46

ἐπέβαλαν τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν καὶ ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν

These two phrases have the same meaning to emphasize that they seized Jesus. Alternate translation: “grabbed Jesus and seized him” or “seized him” (See: Parallelism)

Mark 14:47

τῶν παρεστηκότων

“of the people who were standing nearby”

Mark 14:48

ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς

“Jesus said to the crowd”

ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων συνλαβεῖν με?

Jesus is rebuking the crowd. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is ridiculous that you come here to seize me with swords and clubs, as if I were a robber!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 14:49

ἀλλ’ ἵνα

“But this has happened so that”

Mark 14:50

ἔφυγον πάντες

This refers to the disciples.

Mark 14:51

σινδόνα

a cloth made from the fibers of a flax plant

κρατοῦσιν αὐτόν

“the men seized that man”

Mark 14:52

ὁ δὲ καταλιπὼν τὴν σινδόνα

As the man was trying to run away, the others would have grabbed at his clothing, trying to stop him.

Mark 14:53

After the crowd of the chief priests, scribes, and elders lead Jesus to the high priest, Peter watches nearby while some stand to give false testimony against Jesus.

συνέρχονται πάντες οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς

This can be reordered so that it is easier to understand. “all of the chief priests, the elders, and the scribes had gathered there together”

Mark 14:54

καὶ

This word is used here to mark a shift in the story line as the author begins telling us about Peter.

ἕως ἔσω εἰς τὴν αὐλὴν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως

As Peter followed Jesus, he stopped at the high priest’s courtyard. This can be written clearly. Alternate translation: “and he all the way to the courtyard of the high priest” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ἦν συνκαθήμενος μετὰ τῶν ὑπηρετῶν

Peter sat with the guards who were working at the courtyard. Alternate translation: “he sat in the courtyard among the guards” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:55

δὲ

This word is used here to mark a shift in the story line as the author continues telling us about Jesus being put on trial.

εἰς τὸ θανατῶσαι αὐτόν

They were not the ones who would execute Jesus; rather, they would order someone else to do it. Alternate translation: “so they might have someone execute Jesus” (See: Metonymy)

οὐχ ηὕρισκον

They did not find testimony against Jesus with which they could convict him and have him put to death. Alternate translation: “they did not find any testimony with which to convict him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:56

ἴσαι αἱ μαρτυρίαι οὐκ ἦσαν

This can be written in positive form. “but their testimony contradicted each other”

Mark 14:58

ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν αὐτοῦ λέγοντος

“We heard Jesus say.” The word We refers to the people who falsely testified against Jesus and does not include the people to whom they are speaking. (See: Exclusive and Inclusive ‘We’)

τὸν χειροποίητον…ἀχειροποίητον

Here, hands refers to men. Alternate translation: “made by men … made without man’s help” or “built by men … built without man’s help” (See: Synecdoche)

διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν

“within three days.” This means that the temple would be built within a three-day period.

ἄλλον…οἰκοδομήσω

The word “temple” is understood from the previous phrase. It may be repeated. Alternate translation: “I will build another temple” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 14:59

οὐδὲ οὕτως ἴση ἦν ἡ μαρτυρία αὐτῶν

“even then what they testified contradicted each other.” This can be written in positive form.

Mark 14:60

When Jesus answers that he is the Christ, the high priest and all of the leaders there condemn him as one who deserves to die.

ἀναστὰς…εἰς μέσον

Jesus stands up in the middle of the angry crowd to speak to them. Translate this to show who was present when Jesus stood in their midst. Alternate translation: “stood up among the chief priests, scribes, and elders” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν? τί οὗτοί σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν?

The chief priest is not asking Jesus for information about what the witnesses said. He is asking Jesus to prove what the witnesses said is wrong. Alternate translation: “Are you not going to reply? What do you say in response to the testimony these men are speaking against you?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:61

τοῦ Εὐλογητοῦ

Here God is called the Blessed One. Alternate translation: “of God” (See: Nominal Adjectives)

ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Εὐλογητοῦ

It is best to translate Son with the same word your language would naturally use to refer to a “son” of a human father. Alternate translation: “the Son of the Blessed One” or “the Son of God” (See: Translating Son and Father)

Mark 14:62

ἐγώ εἰμι

This likely has a double meaning: (1) Jesus said this to respond to the high priest’s question. (2) Jesus also said this to call himself “I Am,” which is what God called himself in the Old Testament.

ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως

Here, power is a metonym that represents God. Alternate translation: “sitting at the right hand of God” (See: Metonymy)

ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως

To sit at the right hand of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “he sits in the place of honor beside the all-powerful God” (See: Symbolic Action)

ἐρχόμενον μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ

Here the clouds are described as accompanying Jesus when he returns. Alternate translation: “when he comes down through the clouds in the sky” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 14:63

διαρρήξας τοὺς χιτῶνας αὐτοῦ

The high priest tore his clothes purposefully to show his outrage and horror at what Jesus had said. Alternate translation: “having torn his garments in outrage”

τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων?

This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “We certainly do not need any more people who will testify against this man!” (See: Rhetorical Question)

Mark 14:64

ἠκούσατε τῆς βλασφημίας

This refers to what Jesus said, which the high priest called blasphemy. Alternate translation: “You have heard the blasphemy he has spoken” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ…πάντες

all the people in the room

Mark 14:65

ἤρξαντό τινες

some of the people in the room started

περικαλύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ πρόσωπον

They covered his face with a cloth or blindfold, so he could not see. Alternate translation: “to cover his face with a blindfold” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

προφήτευσον

They mocked him, asking him to tell them who was hitting him. Alternate translation: “Prophesy who hit you” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

οἱ ὑπηρέται

the men who guarded the governor’s house

Mark 14:66

As Jesus had predicted, Peter denies Jesus three times before the rooster crows.

κάτω ἐν τῇ αὐλῇ

“outside in the courtyard”

μία τῶν παιδισκῶν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως

The servant girls worked for the high priest. Alternate translation: “one of the servant girls who worked for the high priest” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:68

ἠρνήσατο

This means to claim that something is not true. In this case, Peter was saying that what the servant girl said about him was not true.

οὔτε οἶδα, οὔτε ἐπίσταμαι σὺ τί λέγεις

Both have I known and I understand have the same meaning here. The meaning is repeated to add emphasis to what Peter is saying. Alternate translation: “I really do not understand what you are talking about” (See: Doublet)

Mark 14:69

ἡ παιδίσκη

This is the same servant girl who identified Peter previously.

οὗτος ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐστιν

The people were identifying Peter as one of Jesus’ disciples. This can be made more clear. Alternate translation: “This one is one of Jesus’ disciples” or “This is one of those who have been with that man they arrested” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 14:71

ἀναθεματίζειν

If in your language you have to name the person who curses someone, state God. Alternate translation: “to say for God to curse him” (See: Idiom)

Mark 14:72

εὐθὺς…ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν

A rooster is a bird that calls out very early in the morning. The loud sound he makes is “crowing.”

ἐκ δευτέρου

Here, second is an ordinal number. (See: Ordinal Numbers)

ἐπιβαλὼν

This idiom means that he was overwhelmed with grief and lost control of his emotions. Alternate translation: “he was overwhelmed with grief” or “he lost control of his emotions” (See: Idiom)

Mark 15

Mark 15 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

“The curtain of the temple was split in two”

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Mark 15:46) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

Important figures of speech in this chapter

Sarcasm

Both by pretending to worship Jesus (Mark 15:19) and by pretending to speak to a king (Mark 15:18), the soldiers and the Jews showed that they hated Jesus and did not believe that he was the Son of God. (See: Irony and mock, mocker, mockery, ridicule, scoff at, laughingstock)

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani?

This is a phrase in Aramaic. Mark transliterates its sounds by writing them using Greek letters. He then explains its meaning. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

Mark 15:1

When the chief priests, the elders, the scribes, and the council gave Jesus over to Pilate, they accused Jesus of doing many bad things. When Pilate asked if what they said was true, Jesus did not answer him.

δήσαντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ἀπήνεγκαν

They commanded for Jesus to be bound, but it would have been the guards who actually bound him and led him away. Alternate translation: “commanded the guards to bind Jesus and then they led him away” (See: Metonymy)

παρέδωκαν Πειλάτῳ

They had Jesus led to Pilate and transferred control of Jesus over to him.

Mark 15:2

σὺ λέγεις

This could mean: (1) Jesus was saying that Pilate, not Jesus, was the one calling him the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “You yourself have said so” (2) Jesus was implying that he is the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “Yes, as you said, I am” or “Yes. It is as you said” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:3

κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ…πολλά

“were accusing Jesus of many things” or “were saying that Jesus had done many bad things”

Mark 15:4

ὁ δὲ Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν

“But Pilate asked Jesus again”

οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν?

You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “Do you have an answer?”

ἴδε

“Look at” or “Listen to” or “Pay attention to”

Mark 15:5

ὥστε θαυμάζειν τὸν Πειλᾶτον

It surprised Pilate that Jesus did not reply and defend himself.

Mark 15:6

Pilate, hoping the crowd will choose Jesus, offers to release a prisoner, but the crowd asks for Barabbas instead.

δὲ

This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line as the author shifts to telling background information about Pilate’s tradition of releasing a prisoner at feasts and about Barabbas. (See: Background Information)

Mark 15:7

ἦν δὲ ὁ λεγόμενος Βαραββᾶς, μετὰ τῶν στασιαστῶν δεδεμένος

“At that time there was a man called Barabbas, who was in prison with some other men”

Mark 15:8

αἰτεῖσθαι καθὼς ἐποίει αὐτοῖς

This refers to Pilate releasing a prisoner at feasts. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “to ask him to release a prisoner to them as he had done in the past” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:10

ἐγίνωσκεν γὰρ ὅτι διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς

This is background information about why Jesus was handed over to Pilate. (See: Background Information)

διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς

They chief priests envied Jesus, probably because so many people were following him and becoming his disciples. Alternate translation: “the chief priests were envious of Jesus. This is why they handed him over” or “the chief priests were envious of Jesus’ popularity among the people. This is why they handed him over” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:11

ἀνέσεισαν τὸν ὄχλον

The author speaks of the chief priests rousing or urging the crowd as if the crowd were a bowl of something that they were stirring. Alternate translation: “roused the crowd” or “urged the crowd” (See: Metaphor)

μᾶλλον τὸν Βαραββᾶν ἀπολύσῃ αὐτοῖς

They requested Pilate to release Barabbas instead of Jesus. Alternate translation: “he would release Barabbas instead of Jesus” (See: Ellipsis)

Mark 15:12

The crowd asks for Jesus’ death, so Pilate turns him over to the soldiers, who mock him, crown him with thorns, strike him, and lead him out to crucify him.

τί οὖν ποιήσω λέγετε τὸν Βασιλέα τῶν Ἰουδαίων?

Pilate asks what he should do with Jesus if he releases Barabbas to them. This can be written clearly. Alternate translation: “If I release Barabbas, what then should I do with the King of the Jews?” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:14

ὁ δὲ Πειλᾶτος ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς

“But Pilate said to the crowd”

Mark 15:15

τῷ ὄχλῳ τὸ ἱκανὸν ποιῆσαι

“to make the crowd happy by doing what they wanted him to do”

τὸν Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας

Pilate did not actually scourge Jesus, but rather his soldiers did.

φραγελλώσας

“having whipped him.” To flog is to beat with an especially painful whip.

παρέδωκεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας, ἵνα σταυρωθῇ

Pilate told his soldiers to take Jesus away to crucify him. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “told his soldiers to take him away and crucify him” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 15:16

τῆς αὐλῆς, ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον

This was where the Roman soldiers in Jerusalem lived, and where the governor stayed when he was in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the courtyard of the soldiers’ barracks” or “the courtyard of the governor’s residence”

ὅλην τὴν σπεῖραν

“the whole unit of soldiers”

Mark 15:17

ἐνδιδύσκουσιν αὐτὸν πορφύραν

Purple was a color worn by royalty. The soldiers did not believe that Jesus was king. They clothed him this way to mock him because others said that he was the King of the Jews.

ἀκάνθινον στέφανον

“a crown made of thorny branches”

Mark 15:18

Χαῖρε, Βασιλεῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων

The greeting “Hail” with a raised hand was only used to greet the Roman emperor. The soldiers did not believe that Jesus was the king of the Jews. Rather they said this to mock him. (See: Irony)

Mark 15:19

καλάμῳ

“a stick” or “a staff”

τιθέντες τὰ γόνατα

A person who kneels bends his knees, so those who kneel are sometimes said to “bend their knees.” Alternate translation: “kneeled” or “knelt” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 15:21

ἀγγαρεύουσιν…ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ

According to Roman law, a solider could force a man he came upon along the road to carry a load. In this case, they forced Simon to carry Jesus’ cross.

ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ

“from outside the city”

ἀγγαρεύουσιν, παράγοντά τινα Σίμωνα Κυρηναῖον, ἐρχόμενον ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ, τὸν πατέρα Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Ῥούφου

This is background information about the man whom the soldiers forced to carry Jesus’ cross. (See: Background Information)

Σίμωνα…Ἀλεξάνδρου…Ῥούφου

These are names of men. (See: How to Translate Names)

Κυρηναῖον

This is the name of a place. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 15:22

The soldiers bring Jesus to Golgotha, where they crucify him with two others. Many people mock him.

Κρανίου Τόπος

“Skull Place” or “Place of the Skull.” This the name of a place. It does not mean that there are lots of skulls there. (See: How to Translate Names)

Κρανίου

A Skull is the head bones, or a head without any flesh on it.

Mark 15:23

ἐσμυρνισμένον οἶνον

It may be helpful to explain that myrrh is a pain-relieving medicine. Alternate translation: “wine mixed with a medicine called myrrh” or “wine mixed with a pain-relieving medicine called myrrh” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:25

ὥρα τρίτη

Here, third here is a ordinal number. This refers to nine o’clock in the morning. Alternate translation: “nine o’clock in the morning” (See: Ordinal Numbers)

Mark 15:26

τῆς αἰτίας αὐτοῦ ἐπιγεγραμμένη

“of the crime they were accusing him of doing”

Mark 15:27

ἕνα ἐκ δεξιῶν καὶ ἕνα ἐξ εὐωνύμων αὐτοῦ

This can be written more clearly. Alternate translation: “one on a cross on the right side of him and one on a cross on the left side of him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:29

κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς αὐτῶν

This is an action people do to show that they disapproved of Jesus. (See: Symbolic Action)

οὐὰ

This is a exclamation of mockery. Use the appropriate exclamation in your language. (See: Exclamations)

ὁ καταλύων τὸν ναὸν καὶ οἰκοδομῶν ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις

The people refer to Jesus by what he earlier prophesied that he would do. Alternate translation: “You who said you would destroy the temple and rebuild it in three days” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:31

ὁμοίως

This refers to the way that the people who were walking by Jesus were mocking him.

ἐμπαίζοντες πρὸς ἀλλήλους

“were saying mocking things about Jesus among themselves”

Mark 15:32

ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω

The leaders did not believe that Jesus is the Christ, the King of Israel. Alternate translation: “He calls himself the Christ and the King of Israel. So let him come down” or “If he is really the Christ and the King of Israel, he should come down” (See: Irony)

πιστεύσωμεν

The means to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “believe in him” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

ὠνείδιζον

mocking, insulting

Mark 15:33

At noon darkness covers the whole land until three o’clock, when Jesus cries out with a loud voice and dies. When Jesus dies, the temple curtain rips from the top to the bottom.

ὥρας ἕκτης

This refers to noon or 12 PM.

σκότος ἐγένετο ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν γῆν

Here the author describes it becoming dark outside as if the darkness were a wave that moved over the land. Alternate translation: “the whole land became dark” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 15:34

τῇ ἐνάτῃ ὥρᾳ

This refers to three o’clock in the afternoon. Alternate translation: “at three o’clock in the afternoon” or “in the middle of the afternoon”

Ἐλωῒ, Ἐλωῒ, λεμὰ σαβαχθάνει

These are Aramaic words that should be copied as is into your language with similar sounds. (See: Copy or Borrow Words)

ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον

“means”

Mark 15:35

καί τινες τῶν παρεστηκότων, ἀκούσαντες ἔλεγον

You can state this clearly that they misunderstood what Jesus said. Alternate translation: “When some of those standing there heard his words, they misunderstood and said” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:36

ὄξους

“with vinegar”

καλάμῳ

“a stick.” This was a staff made from a reed.

ἐπότιζεν αὐτόν

“was giving it to Jesus.” The man held up the staff so that Jesus could drink wine from the sponge. Alternate translation: “held it up to Jesus” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:38

τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχίσθη εἰς δύο

Mark is showing that God himself split the curtain of the temple. You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God split the curtain of the temple in two” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 15:39

ὁ κεντυρίων

This is the centurion who supervised the soldiers who crucified Jesus.

ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐξ ἐναντίας αὐτοῦ

“who stood in front of Jesus”

ὅτι οὕτως ἐξέπνευσεν

“how Jesus had died” or “the way Jesus had died”

Υἱὸς Θεοῦ

This is an important title for Jesus. (See: Translating Son and Father)

Mark 15:40

ἀπὸ μακρόθεν θεωροῦσαι

“watching from far away”

ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ

This can be written without the parentheses. Alternate translation: “who was the mother of James the younger and of Joses”

Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ

“of the younger James.” This man was referred to as the younger probably to distinguish him from another man named James.

Ἰωσῆ

This Joses was not that same person as the younger brother of Jesus. See how you translated the same name in Mark 6:3. (See: How to Translate Names)

Σαλώμη

Salome is the name of a woman. (See: How to Translate Names)

Mark 15:41

αἳ ὅτε ἦν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ καὶ διηκόνουν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἄλλαι πολλαὶ αἱ συναναβᾶσαι αὐτῷ εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα

“When Jesus was in Galilee these women followed him and served him, along with many other women who had come up with him to Jerusalem.” This is background information about the women who watched the crucifixion from a distance. (See: Background Information)

συναναβᾶσαι αὐτῷ εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα

Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going up to Jerusalem and going down from it.

Mark 15:42

Joseph of Arimathea asks Pilate for the body of Jesus, which he wraps in linen and puts in a tomb.

ἤδη ὀψίας γενομένης

Here, evening is spoken of as if it were something that is able to come from one place to another. Alternate translation: “when it had already become evening” or “when it was evening” (See: Metaphor)

Mark 15:43

ἐλθὼν Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας, εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ; τολμήσας, εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς τὸν Πειλᾶτον

The phrase having come refers to Joseph coming to Pilate, which is also described after the background information is given, but his coming is referenced before for emphasis and to help introduce him to the story. There may be a different way to do this in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph of Arimathea was a respected member of the council who also was himself waiting for the kingdom of God. He boldly came to Pilate” (See: Introduction of New and Old Participants)

Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας

“Joseph from Arimathea.” Joseph is the name of a man, and Arimathea is the name of the place his is from. (See: How to Translate Names)

εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ

This is background information about Joseph. (See: Background Information)

τολμήσας, εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς τὸν Πειλᾶτον

“he boldly went to Pilate” or “he boldly went in to where Pilate was”

ᾐτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ

You can state this clearly that he wanted to get the body so that he could bury it. Alternate translation: “asked for permission to get the body of Jesus in order to bury it” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:44

ὁ δὲ Πειλᾶτος ἐθαύμασεν εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκεν; καὶ προσκαλεσάμενος τὸν κεντυρίωνα

Pilate heard people saying that Jesus was dead. This surprised him, so he asked the centurion if it was true. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “Pilate was amazed when he heard that Jesus was already dead, so calling the centurion” (See: Assumed Knowledge and Implicit Information)

Mark 15:45

ἐδωρήσατο τὸ πτῶμα τῷ Ἰωσήφ

“he permitted Joseph to take Jesus’ body”

Mark 15:46

σινδόνα

Linen is cloth made from the fibers of a flax plant. See how you translated this in Mark 14:51.

καθελὼν αὐτὸν…προσεκύλισεν λίθον

You may need to make explicit that Joseph probably had help from other people when he took Jesus’ body down from the cross, prepared it for the tomb, and closed the tomb. Alternate translation: “after he and others took him down … they rolled a stone” (See: Metonymy)

μνήματι ὃ ἦν λελατομημένον ἐκ πέτρας

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a tomb that someone had previously cut out of solid rock” (See: Active or Passive)

λίθον ἐπὶ

“a huge flat stone in front of”

Mark 15:47

Ἰωσῆτος

This Joses was not that same person as the younger brother of Jesus. See how you translated the same name in Mark 6:3. (See: How to Translate Names)

ποῦ τέθειται

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the place where Joseph and the others buried Jesus’ body” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 16

Mark 16 General Notes

Special concepts in this chapter

The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Mark 15:46) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

A young man dressed in a white robe

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 28:1-2 and Mark 16:5 and Luke 24:4 and John 20:12)

Mark 16:1

On the first day of the week, women come early because they expect to use spices to anoint Jesus’ body. They are surprised to see a young man who tells them Jesus is alive, but they are afraid and do not tell anyone.

καὶ διαγενομένου τοῦ Σαββάτου

That is, after the Sabbath, the seventh day of the week, had ended and the first day of the week had begun.

Mark 16:4

ἀποκεκύλισται ὁ λίθος

You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had rolled away the stone” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 16:6

ἠγέρθη

The angel is emphatically stating that Jesus has risen from the dead. You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “He arose!” or “God raised him from the dead!” or “He raised himself from the dead!” (See: Active or Passive)

Mark 9

Mark 9:10

Mark is figuratively describing something Jesus would say by association with his mouth, which he would use to say something. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: Metonymy)